I777 Galaxy S II User Manual Samsung

S2 to the manual a8354f79-c509-439e-9ef8-ec0fbe311ee1

User Manual: Samsung-S-II-I777-Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 248 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

MOBILE PHONE
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
SGH-I777_UM_English_UCLE4_WC_052212_F4
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the
rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare
derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No
title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain
with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered
under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com
.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS
System (Automated Response System) at:
http://www.samsung.com/us/support
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Toll Free Tel:
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
http://www.samsungusa.com
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
and are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license
from SRS Labs, Inc.
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under
license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com
for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX
videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap
Applications >
Settings > About phone > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register
).
Go to
vod.divx.com
for more information on how to complete your registration.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
TM
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be
used and protected.
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit
http://www.att.com/privacy
.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to
hear and be
heard
™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.
How Does It Work?
•
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.
•
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise -
from both ends of a call.
•
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.
•
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,
without worrying about surrounding noise.
1
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started .............................6
Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen . . . . . .12
Configuring your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . .14
Setting Up Your Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Android System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Safe Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ........17
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Customizing Your Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Notification Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Section 3: Call Functions ............................44
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Making a Call Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . . . 46
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Section 4: Entering Text ..............................55
Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard . . . . 55
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad . . . . . . 56
Using ABC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Show Correction Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keypad . . . . 58
2
Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Google Voice Typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address
Book ......................................................... 61
AT&T Address Book Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Joining Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Address Book Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Managing Address Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Section 6: Multimedia ................................. 73
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Google Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Qik Lite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Play Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Video Maker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Camera Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Section 7: Messaging ................................. 95
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Using Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3
Section 8: Changing Your Settings ...........107
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
More... Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Power Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Accounts and Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Location Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Language and Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Backup and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Dock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Developer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
About Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Section 9: Connections .............................140
Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Section 10: Applications ...........................156
AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Amazon Kindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
AT&T Code Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
AT&T FamilyMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
AT&T Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4
Facebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Kies air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Mini Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
myAT&T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
News & Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Play Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Qik Lite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Quickoffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Social Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Video Maker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Voice Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Words Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
YP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Section 11: Health and Safety
Information ............................................ 185
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . .185
5
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . .191
FCC Part 15 Information to User: . . . . . . . . . . .191
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . .195
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
GPS & AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . .204
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . .206
Section 12: Warranty Information ............208
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
End User License Agreement for Software . . . 213
Social Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Social Hub Privacy Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . 226
USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT . . . . . . . 227
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO
THIRD PARTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
CHILDREN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION
WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS . . . 229
CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION
WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Social Hub End User License Agreement . . . . 231
Section 13: Samsung Product
Registration ............................................236
Index ...........................................................237
6
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to start using your phone by first
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then
setting up your voice mail.
Setting Up Your Phone
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM
into their corresponding internal compartments. The
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal
area.
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into
the slot on the bottom side of your phone (1).
2. Lift the cover up (2) and away from the phone (3).
Installing the SIM Card
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many
others features.
Getting Started 7
Important!
The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,
so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach
of small children.
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket
(as shown) until the card locks into place.
•
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned
as shown.
Note:
If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot
if the SIM is not detected.
Removing and Installing the Memory Card
You can use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to
expand available memory space if you desire. This secure
digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and
data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory
card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other
devices.
Note:
Your phone has been tested to support up to a 32GB
memory card.
Correct
Incorrect
8
Installing the Memory Card
1. Remove the battery. Use your thumbnail or a sharp
object to lift the battery up (1) and then away from the
device (2).
2. Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as
shown).
•
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and
the card is securely inserted.
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”
on page 42.
Removing the Memory Card
1. Remove the battery.
2. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.
3. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.
Correct
Incorrect
Getting Started 9
Installing the Battery
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
Installing the Back Cover
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)
and press down (2).
10
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you
have a secure seal.
Note:
Make sure the battery is properly installed before
switching on the phone.
Charging a Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and
chargers.
Note:
Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, web browser use, and other variables may
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.
Although you can use the phone while the battery is
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.
Note:
You must fully charge the battery before using your
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges
fully in approximately 4 hours.
Using the Travel Charger
Important!
Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to
connection. If the battery is not properly installed
and the wall charger is connected, the handset
may power off and on continuously, preventing
proper operation.
Getting Started 11
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a
standard AC wall outlet.
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from
the interface connector jack on the phone.
Warning!
If your handset has a touch screen display, please
note that a touch screen responds best to a light
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and
void the warranty. For more information, refer to
“Standard Limited Warranty” on page 208.
Note:
Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the
battery, can cause damage to the phone.
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone
automatically turns off.
Switching the Phone On or Off
1. Press and hold (on the upper right side of the
phone) until the phone switches on.
2. Sweep your finger across the screen to unlock the
phone.
Incorrect
Correct
12
Note:
The display language is preset to English at the factory.
To change the language, use the Language menu. For
more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 107.
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold , until
the
Device options
screen displays.
4. Tap
Power off
to switch off the phone.
5. At the
Power off
prompt, tap
OK
.
Locking and Unlocking the Touch
Screen
1. Press to lock the touch screen.
2. Press again to display the main screen then
sweep your finger across the glass to unlock the touch
screen.
Configuring your Phone
When you first turn on your phone, you will need to set up a
few things.
1. The Welcome screen displays. The default language for
your phone is English. If you would like to select
another language, tap
English
and select one of the
listed languages.
2. Tap
Start
to begin.
The
Make it Google
screen is displayed.
3. If you already have a Google account, tap
Sign in
,
otherwise, tap
Get an account
and follow the on-screen
instructions to create a Google account. You can also
tap
Not now
if you want to create an account later.
Note:
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you
will need to create a Google™ Account when you first
use your device. With a Google Account, you will have
access to more Google applications and applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
Getting Started 13
4. At the
Use Google location
screen, a blue checkmark
appears next to the text that explains that you allow
Google’s location service to collect anonymous location
data from your phone. If you disagree, tap the
checkmark to remove it.
5. A blue checkmark also appears next to the text that
explains that you allow your location to be used for
Google search results and other Google services. If you
disagree, tap the checkmark to remove it. Tap
Next
.
6. In the provided fields, enter your
First
and
Last
name so
that your phone can personalize some applications.
Tap
Next
.
7. Read the information on the
Google services
screen,
then tap
Next
.
8. At the
Setup complete
screen, tap
Finish
to complete
your setup.
The main Home screen is displayed.
Creating a New Google Account
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
If you did not create a new account during the setup
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these
steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Gmail
.
The
Add a Google Account
screen displays.
2. If you already have a Google account, tap
Existing
to
sign in and add the account to your phone.
– or –
Tap
New
to create a new Google account.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google
Account.
Note:
If you already have a Google account, you only need to
sign in.
14
Retrieving your Google Account
Password
A Google account password is required for Google
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to
navigate to
http://google.com/accounts
.
2. Once the URL loads, click on the
Can’t access your
account?
link.
3. From the
Please select your issue
section, select
I forgot
my password
.
4. Select
Reset your password here
, then follow the
password recovery procedure.
Setting Up Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap the
icon.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a
greeting, and record your name.
Note:
These steps may be different depending on your
network.
Accessing Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap the
icon.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the
voice mail center.
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the
asterisk key on the phone you are using.
3. Enter your passcode.
Android System Recovery
Android System Recovery is used for Google updates but the
average user will never need to perform a system recovery.
Note:
If you entered this menu by mistake, use the Volume
Up/Down keys to select
reboot system now
, then press
the Power key. Your phone will then continue to boot up.
To enter the Android System Recovery mode, follow these
steps:
Getting Started 15
1. With the phone turned off, press the Power key and
Volume Up/Down keys at the same time until the phone
switches on.
2. Once the Samsung Galaxy S II logo appears, release
the Power key while continuing to press the Volume
Up/Down keys.
3. Continue to press the Volume Up/Down keys for at
least 8 seconds, until Recovery mode is launched and
the Android System Recovery screen is displayed.
4. Release the Volume Up/Down keys.
5. The following options are available:
• reboot system now
: this option turns on your phone.
• apply update from external storage
: this option allows you to
apply updates from your memory card to your phone.
• wipe data/factory reset
: deletes all data from the phone
except pictures and videos. For more information, refer to
“Factory Data Reset”
on page 134.
• wipe cache partition
: allows you to delete all cache data such
as log files.
• apply update from cache
: allows you to update your phone’s
software once it has been placed in the cache after you have
performed a Software update from the Settings menu.
• test redbend fota[FS]
: for development purposes only.
6. Use the Volume Up/Down keys to scroll up or down,
then use the Power key to make a selection.
Safe Mode
You can boot your phone into Safe Mode if you wish to
troubleshoot whether or not added applications are causing
problems with the device. Safe mode will only load basic
system software.
1. Make sure your phone is turned off.
2. Press and hold the power key ( ) to boot up your
device.
3. After the animation starts to display, continually tap the
key until the backlight turns on behind the four
bottom keys.
4. Press and hold the key.
When the Home screen is displayed,
Safe mode
is
displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.
16
Troubleshooting
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may
need to reset the device to regain functionality.
If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and
hold the Power/Lock Key for 8 to 10 seconds.
For more information, refer to “Android System Recovery”
on page 14.
Understanding Your Phone 17
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
This section outlines some key features of your phone and
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and
provides information on using a memory card.
Features of Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
•
Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone
menus and options including applications and seven home
screens
•
Android v 4.0.3, Ice Cream Sandwich Platform
•
Virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard
•
Ready access to the Internet
•
Built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
®
technology
•
Brilliant wide-screen AMOLED display
•
8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with 2 Megapixel Front
Facing camera
•
USB Tethering-capable
•
Mobile Hotspot Capability
•
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation
•
microSD card compatibility for use in data storage and access
•
HSDPA 21 mbps high speed download capability
•
Up to 32 GB expandable memory slot
•
Sync and update social network applications
•
Corporate and Personal Email
•
DivX Certified
®
to play DivX
®
video up to HD 1080p, including
premium content
•
AllShare™ to share your media content across DLNA certified
devices
•
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and
Instant Messaging with Google Talk™
•
Over 250,000 Apps available to download from the Play Store™
•
Access to Movies and TV Shows with Samsung Media Hub
•
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)
18
Front View of Your Phone
1.
Front facing camera
: allows you to take pictures of
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to
Self shot.
2.
Proximity and Light sensors
: uses the ambient light
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to
your ear, the touch screen will turn off. Also used to
automatically adjust brightness of the display.
3. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your
favorite applications on the Home screen.
4. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important
features such as Phone (keypad), Messaging, Web, and
Applications. For more information, refer to “Primary
Shortcuts” on page 21.
5. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with
additional options for different features and
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, and Web.
6. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold
to display Task Manager.
7
3
2
4
5
8
9
6
113
12
11
10
Understanding Your Phone 19
7. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating
a menu or web page.
8. Search key: allows you to access the Google Search
feature where you can search for items on the internet.
9.
Home screen indicator
: shows which Home screen is
presently displayed.
10. Home screen tips Widget: displays tips to using your
home screen. Tap the text area to see 6 different tips.
11. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search
that allows you to search for items on the internet.
12. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to
operate your phone, such as the received signal
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,
missed calls, etc.
13.
External speaker
: allows you to hear the caller.
Side Views of Your Phone
4
5
1
32
6
20
1.
Volume keys
: allow you to adjust the ringer volume
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly
press down either volume key ( ) to mute the
ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a message or
using the browser in the Applications folder.
2. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for
convenient, hands-free conversations.
3.
Microphone
: allows other callers to hear you when you
are speaking to them. This microphone is also used
when you are using voice related applications.
4. Power/Lock key: ( ) lets you power your phone
on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the touch
screen. For more information on locking your phone,
see “Locking and Unlocking the Phone” on page 33.
5.
Microphone
: allows other callers to hear you when you
are using the speakerphone.
6.
3.5mm Headset jack
: allows you to plug in headphones.
Rear View of Your Phone
1.
Camera lens
: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.
2.
External speaker
: allows you to hear when the
Speakerphone is turned on.
3.
Flash
: is used to provide adequate light when taking
pictures in dark places.
13
2
Understanding Your Phone 21
Display Layout
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access
to application icons. For more information, refer to “Front
View of Your Phone” on page 18.
Primary Shortcuts
There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that
appear at the bottom of all Home screens. The default
shortcuts are:
•
Phone
for dialing a number.
•
Messaging
for creating and viewing Messages.
•
Web
for surfing the Internet.
•
Applications
for accessing the applications on your phone.
While viewing the Applications Menu, the Application
shortcut changes to
Home
, which returns you to the Main
screen.
You can change the Phone, Messaging, and Web application
shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Applications
menu.
For more information, refer to “Adding and Removing
Primary Shortcuts” on page 36.
Indicator Icons
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s
display and Indicator area:
Displays your current signal strength. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You
cannot send or receive any calls or access online
information.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when there is no network available.
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Displays when a call is in progress and you exit the
call screen.
Displays when a call is on hold and you exit the call
screen.
Displays when the speakerphone is on and you exit
the call screen.
22
Displays when a call has been missed.
Displays when a call has been muted.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
forward. For more information, refer to “Call
Settings” on page 113.
Displays when you phone is set to automatically
reject calls from your Reject list or all calls.
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is
fully charged.
Displays when your battery is charging. Also
displays battery charge level.
Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery
only has three percent power remaining and will
immediately shutdown.
Displays when your connection to an EDGE network
is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA,
HSPA, HSPA+, or 4G network is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, HSPA+, or 4G network.
Displays when your phone is downloading a file. It
will blink green when it is installing.
Displays when a Play Store download has
completed.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when the phone is connected to a
computer via a supported USB cable connection.
Displays when the phone is tethered via a
supported USB cable connection.
Displays when a new text or multimedia message
is received.
Understanding Your Phone 23
Displays when a new voice mail is received.
Displays when Email is received.
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event
has arrived. For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 160.
Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified
time. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page
162.
Displays when Silent mode is set to Mute.
Displays when Silent mode is set to Vibrate.
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired
with the phone.
Displays when Bluetooth is on but is not connected
to a Bluetooth device.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a
communication issue with the target Wireless
Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and your phone
is connected to another device. It also displays
when your phone as been configured as a portable
Wi-Fi hotspot.
Displays when your phone is connected to a PC
using Kies air.
Displays when your phone is connected to a Digital
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device
using the AllShare application.
Displays when GPS is active and acquiring a signal.
Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.
24
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
“Changing Your Settings” on page 107.
Application Icons
The Application menu provides quick access to the items you
use most frequently.
The following table contains a description of each
application. If the application is already described in another
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that
particular section is provided.
For information on navigating through the Applications icons,
see “Navigating Through the Application Menus” on page 34.
1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap one of the
application icons.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. To return to the main Home screen, tap .
The following applications are available:
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.
AllShare
: AllShare allows your phone to stream photos,
music and videos from its memory to other Digital
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Your
phone can also play digital content streamed from
other DLNA certified devices. For more information,
refer to “AllShare” on page 156.
Amazon Kindle
: This application allows you to
download books, magazines, and newspapers to read
on your phone. For more information, refer to “Amazon
Kindle” on page 157.
AT&T Code Scanner
: AT&T Code Scanner allows you to
scan 2D (QR and datamatrix codes) and 1D (UPC and
EAN) barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.
For more information, refer to “AT&T Code Scanner” on
page 157.
AT&T FamilyMap
: Provides peace of mind by being able
to conveniently locate a family member from your
wireless phone or PC and know that your family's
location information is secure and private. For more
information, refer to “AT&T FamilyMap” on page 158.
Understanding Your Phone 25
AT&T Navigator
: AT&T Navigator provides you with
access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These
programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn
navigation, but also access local searches based on
a variety of category parameters. For more
information, refer to “AT&T Navigator” on page 159.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can
maximize your battery performance, maximize your
data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi
networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and
track your data use. For more information, refer to
“AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 149.
Calculator
: Using this feature you can use the phone as
a calculator. The calculator provides the basic
arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a
scientific calculator. For more information, refer to
“Calculator” on page 159.
Calendar
: With the Calendar feature, you can consult
the calendar by day, week, or month, create events,
and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if necessary. For
more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 160.
Camera
: Use your 8.0 megapixel camera to produce
photos and videos. For more information, refer to
“Camera” on page 82.
Clock
: The Clock application allows you to access
alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use
a timer. For more information, refer to “Clock” o n p a g e
162.
Contacts
: You can manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or
group. You can also synchronize your phone Address
Book with AT&T Address Book, the network backup
service. For more information, refer to “Contacts and
Your Address Book” on page 61.
Downloads
: The Downloads application allows you to
manage all of your downloads from Play Store and the
Browser. For more information, refer to “Downloads”
on page 164.
26
Email
: Email enables you to review and create email
using various email services. You can also receive text
message alerts when you receive an important email.
For more information, refer to “Using Email” on page
102. This icon only displays in the Applications menu
when Email has been removed as a Home screen
shortcut.
Facebook
: Facebook enables you to go directly to your
Facebook account without accessing it through your
web browser. For more information, refer to
“Facebook” on page 165.
Gallery
: The Gallery is where you view photos and play
back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic
editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as
wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture
message. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 81.
Gmail
: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone.
Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail
can automatically synchronize with your Gmail
account on the web. For more information, refer to
“Using Gmail” on page 103.
Google +
: Google+ makes messaging and sharing with
your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of
friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your
Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with
everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to
automatically upload videos and photos to your own
private album on Google+. For more information, refer
to “Google +” on page 106.
Kies air
: Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC
wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on
the same Wi-Fi network. You can view call logs, videos,
photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even send SMS
messages from your home computer. For more
information, refer to “Kies air” on page 154.
Understanding Your Phone 27
Latitude
: With Google Latitude, you can see the location
of all of your friends on a map or on a list. You can also
share or hide your location. For more information, refer
to “Latitude” on page 166.
Live TV
: Live TV is a subscription service that allows you
to watch your favorite TV shows using your handset.
For more information, refer to “Live TV” on page 167.
Maps
: Depending on your location, you can view basic,
custom, and satellite maps and local business
information, including locations, contact information,
and driving directions. You can also post public
messages about a location and track your friends. For
more information, refer to “Maps” on page 167.
Media Hub
: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the
hottest movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase
your favorite content and watch from the convenience
of anywhere. For more information, refer to “Media
Hub” on page 73.
Memo
: This feature allows you to create a memo. For
more information, refer to “Memo” on page 169.
Messenger
: Messenger allows you to bring groups of
friends together into a simple group conversation.
When you get a new conversation in Messenger,
Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more
information, refer to “Messenger” on page 106.
Mini Diary
: The Mini Diary allows you to keep a diary of
your daily activities and also attach pictures. You can
publish your diary entries to Facebook and MySpace.
For more information, refer to “Mini Diary” on page
170.
Movies
: The Movies application allows you to rent
m ov ie s t o w a tc h o n y ou r p ho ne . Fo r m or e i nf or ma ti on ,
refer to “Movies” on page 171.
Music Player
: Music Player allows you to play music
files that you have stored on your phone and memory
card. You can also create playlists. For more
information, refer to “Music Player” on page 75.
My Files
: My Files allows you to manage your sounds,
images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other
memory card data in one convenient location. For more
information, refer to “My Files” on page 172.
28
myAT&T
: MyAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T
account. You can review and pay your bill, check
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or
change your rate plan. For more information, refer to
“myAT&T” on page 172.
Navigation
: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS
navigation system with voice guidance. You can type or
speak your destination. For more information, refer to
“Navigation” on page 173.
News & Weather
: Displays current news and weather
for your location. For more information, refer to “News
& Weather” on page 175.
Photo Editor
: The Photo Editor application provides
basic editing functions for pictures that you take on
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like
brightness, contrast, and color it also provides a wide
variety of effects used for editing the picture. For more
information, refer to “Photo Editor” on page 93.
Now is the time for all good
men to come to the aid of their
country. The quick brown fox
jumps over the lazy dog.
Places
: Places is an application that uses Google Maps
and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes,
Bars, Attractions, and more. You can also add your own
locations. For more information, refer to “Places” on
page 175.
Play Books
: With Google Play Books, you can find
more than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of
thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. For more
information, refer to “Play Books” on page 176.
Play Movies
: With Google Play Movies, you can rent
thousands of different movies. You can watch instantly,
or download your movie for offline viewing at a later
time. For more information, refer to “Play Movies” on
page 81.
Play Music
:
With the Music application, while online, you can
play music that you have added to your music file as well as
any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can
listen to music you have copied from your PC.
For more
information, refer to “Google Play Music” on page 78.
Understanding Your Phone 29
Play Store
: The Play Store provides access to
downloadable applications and games to install on
your phone. For more information, refer to “Play Store”
on page 176.
Qik Lite
: Allows you to record and share live video from
your device with your friends, family and your favorite
social networks. For more information, refer to “Qik
Lite” on page 79.
Quickoffice
: The Quickoffice application allows you to
create and save Microsoft Word and Excel documents.
You can also view existing Powerpoint presentations
and PDFs. For more information, refer to “Quickoffice”
on page 177.
Search
: The Search application is the same on-screen
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar
on your main Home screen. For more information, refer
to “Google Search Bar” on page 31.
Settings
: This icon navigates to the sound and phone
settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:
display, security, memory, and any extra settings
associated with your phone. For more information,
refer to “Changing Your Settings” on page 107.
LITE
Social Hub
: With Social Hub, you can now easily and
intuitively satisfy all of your relevant communication
needs from one integrated user experience. E-mails,
instant messaging, social network contents, and
calendar contents from all major service providers are
available. For more information, refer to “Social Hub”
on page 178.
Talk
: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based
application for instant messaging offered by Google.
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats
area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search
a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For
more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 105.
Task
: The Task application allows you to keep track of
tasks that you have. You can also sync them with
different accounts. For more information, refer to
“Task” on page 179.
30
Task manager
: The Task manager application provides
information about the processes and programs
running on your phone, as well as the memory status.
It can also be used to terminate processes and
applications. For more information, refer to “Task
Manager” on page 179.
Video Maker
: Video Maker allows you to custom-make
your own videos. You can add themes, music, pictures,
and other videos to you video. For more information,
refer to “Video Maker” on page 81.
Video Player
: The Video Player application plays video
files stored on your microSD card. For more
information, refer to “Video Player” on page 80.
Voice command
: With the Voice command application
you can use your voice to perform operations that you
would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a
phone number, texting a message, playing music, etc.
For more information, refer to “Voice Command” on
page 180.
Voice Recorder
: The Voice Recorder allows you to
record an audio file up to one minute long and then
immediately send it as a message. For more
information, refer to “Voice Recorder” on page 181.
Voice talk
: With the Voice talk application you can use
your voice to perform operations that you would
normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone
number, texting a message, playing music, etc. For
more information, refer to “Voice Talk” on page 181.
Words Free
: You can play Words Free, everyone’s
favorite crossword game, with all of your friends that
have an Android device. For more information, refer to
“Words Free” on page 182.
YouTube
: YouTube is a video sharing website on which
users can upload and share videos, and view them in
MPEG-4 format. For more information, refer to
“YouTube” on page 182.
Understanding Your Phone 31
Tip:
To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently
used applications to the Home screen or to the folders you
created. For details, see “Customizing Your Home Screen”
on page 35.
Google Search Bar
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet
search engine powered by Google™.
1. From the main home screen, sweep your screen to the
left twice and then tap the Google Search bar
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want
to search for, then tap .
3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. For more
information, refer to “Voice Talk” on page 181.
Menu Navigation
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has seven home
screens.
Command Keys
Menu Key
Press
Menu
to display a context-sensitive menu of
options for the current screen or feature.
Home Key
Press
Home
to display the main Home screen. Press and
hold to display recently used apps and access the Task
manager.
Back Key
Press
Back
to return to the previous screen, option or
step.
Search Key
Press
Search
to launch Quick Search, to search the web and
your phone.
YP
: The YP (Yellowpages) application provides quick
and ready access to businesses, map locations, and
storage of your favorite searches. This application
allows you to tap into local businesses, locations, and
events, connecting you to your search in real-time. For
more information, refer to “YP” on page 183.
32
Terms used in this user manual
Tap
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:
•
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.
•
Tap a menu item to select it.
•
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
Double Tap
Lightly touch the screen twice. For example:
•
Double Tap the screen when using Voice talk to automatically
prepare your device for voice commands.
Touch and Hold
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For
example:
•
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
•
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Sweep
To sweep, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. Use sweep when:
•
Unlocking the screen
•
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu
Panning
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:
•
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to
another page.
For more information, refer to “Motion” on page 136.
Tilt
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:
•
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.
For more information, refer to “Motion” on page 136.
Turn over
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For
example:
•
Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone
over.
Understanding Your Phone 33
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
To unlock your phone:
1. Press the lock button located on the upper right
side of your phone.
2. The lock screen will display with
Swipe screen to
unlock
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.
4. The Home screen will display as shown above.
Home Screen Overview
The main home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets
to give you instant access to information and applications.
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by
pressing .
Navigating Through the Home Screens
Your phone initially has seven home screens. If you like, you
can place different applications on each of the home
screens.
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen
is located in the middle with three Home screens on
each side.
34
Navigating Through the Application Menus
Your phone initially has four Application Menus available.
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application
Menus:
1. At the Home screen, tap . The first Application
Menu will be displayed.
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other three
menus.
3. Tap one of the application icons.
Note:
As you add applications, the number of Application
menus that you have available will increase.
Navigating Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,
Contacts, Messaging, or Web.
To access a sub-menu:
1. Press .
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone
screen.
Understanding Your Phone 35
2. Tap an option.
Accessing Recently-Used Applications
1. Press and hold from any screen to open the
recently-used applications window.
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
Tap
Task manager
to go to the Task manager.
Customizing Your Home Screen
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
•
Creating Shortcuts
•
Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen
•
Repositioning Widgets
•
Creating Folders
•
Changing the Wallpaper
•
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a
feature, action, or launch an application.
Note:
To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the
new screen, then add the shortcut.
Adding a shortcut from the Applications Menu
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Tap to display your current applications.
Sub-Menu items
36
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired
application.
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the
Applications tab.
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current page. Once complete, release the screen to
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the
current screen.
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.
4. From the
Add to Home
window tap
Shortcuts
.
5. Tap a shortcut from the available list.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to add the new
shortcut to your current Home screen.
Deleting a shortcut
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it
from its location on the current screen.
3. Drag the icon over the Remove icon and release it.
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items
turn red.
Note:
This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes
it from the current screen.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
exception of the
Applications
and
Home
shortcuts.
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap to display your current applications.
3. Press and tap
View type
.
4. Tap
Customizable grid
. A green circle will appear next
to the option.
5. Press and tap
Edit
.
The
Edit applications
screen is displayed.
6. Tap
OK
.
7. Scroll through the list and locate your desired
application.
Understanding Your Phone 37
8. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it over
the primary shortcut that you want to replace. The new
primary shortcut then appears at the bottom of the
screen. The old primary shortcut will return to the
menu.
9. Press and tap
Save
.
10. Press to return to the main Home screen.
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home
screens.
Note:
When a primary shortcut is removed, it will then appear
as an option in the Application menu.
Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either
your Applications tab or on the main or extended Home
screens. Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-
screen application.
Note:
To move a Widget from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Activate the new
screen, then add the Widget.
Adding a Widget
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
4. From the
Add to Home
window tap
Widgets
.
5. Tap an available Widget to place it on your current
screen.
Removing a Widget
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around
on the screen.
2. Drag the Widget over the Remove icon and release
it.
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn
red.
Note:
This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just
removes it from the current Home screen.
Moving Icons in the Applications Menu
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap to display your current applications.
38
3. Press and tap
View type
.
4. Tap
Customizable grid
. A green circle will appear next
to the option.
5. Press and tap
Edit
.
6. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to
move.
7. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.
8. Press and tap
Save
.
9. Press to return to the main Home screen.
Creating and Managing Folders
Folders are located on any of the seven available Home
screens and can contain both files (such as data and images)
and Contact information or entries.
To create a folder on-screen follow these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
4. From the
Add to Home
window tap
Folders
.
5. Tap an available folder type to place it on your current
screen.
•
Choices include New folder, All contacts, Contacts with phone
numbers, Received list from Bluetooth, and Starred contacts.
Note:
Starred contacts are those Contact entries tagged as
very important.
Changing the Wallpaper
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home
screens by following these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3. From the
Add to Home
window tap
Wallpapers
.
4. Tap one of the following options:
• Gallery
: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken
with your camera.
• Live wallpapers
: select an animated wallpaper.
• Wallpaper gallery
: select from many still-life wallpapers.
5. Select a wallpaper and tap
Set wallpaper
or
Save
.
Understanding Your Phone 39
Moving Home Screens
Your phone comes with seven Home screens. You can
arrange the screens in any order that you want.
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press and tap
Edit
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.
In the following example, the second Home screen is
moved to the last position.
When you move a Home screen, the other Home
screens will be re-ordered automatically.
5. Press to return to the main Home screen.
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
You can delete Home screens and then add Home screens
later if you want.
To delete a Home screen, follow these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press and tap
Edit
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.
40
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the bottom of the
screen.
5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to
delete, the
Home screen has items. Delete?
prompt is
displayed.
6. Tap
Yes
to remove the page, otherwise, tap
No
.
7. Press to return to the main Home screen.
To add a Home screen, follow these steps:
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press and tap
Edit
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen that contains and
drag it to the new location.
Note:
The icon will only be displayed if a Home screen has
previously been deleted.
Understanding Your Phone 41
4. Press to return to the main Home screen.
You can now add items to your new Home screen.
Notification Bar
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show
information about processes that are running, recent
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
Clearing Notifications
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
2. Tap the
Clear
button.
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.
Clear Button
42
Memory Card
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The
device has a USB SD card mode.
Using the SD Card
There are several methods for using the SD card:
1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music,
videos, or other types of files and media).
2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other
dependant media or applications.
Important!
The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and
Video functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD
card. Your device can support SDHC cards up to
32GB capacity.
SD Card Overview
After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your
computer to access and manage the SD card.
Important!
If access to the external SD card is not available,
download and install the USB drivers.
Mounting the SD Card
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You
must mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the
SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer.
Important!
You must disable USB storage to mount the SD
card.
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For
more information, refer to “Removing and Installing the
Memory Card” on page 7.
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available
information on it.
Understanding Your Phone 43
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to
the SD card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap
Unmount SD
card
.
3. Tap
OK
.
For more information, refer to “Removing and Installing
the Memory Card” on page 7.
SD card Available Memory Status
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. The available memory for Device, USB, and SD card
displays under the
Total space
and
Available
headings.
Erasing Files from the SD card
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,
refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 42.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Tap
Format SD card
.
3. At the
Format SD card
confirmation prompt, tap
Format
SD card
.
Warning!
Performing the next step erases all data stored on
the SD card.
4. Tap
Delete all
to format or press to cancel.
44
Section 3: Call Functions
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also
includes the features and functionality associated with
making or answering a call.
For more information, refer to “Call Settings” on page 113.
Displaying Your Phone Number
Tap ➔
Settings
➔
About phone
➔
Status
. Your
phone number is displayed in the
My phone number
field.
Making a Call
1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.
2. Tap to make the call.
Note:
When you activate the
Auto redial
option in the Voice Call
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times
when the person does not answer the call or is already
on the phone. For more information, refer to “Call
Settings” on page 113.
Making an International Call
1. From the Home screen, tap , then touch and hold
. The + character appears.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,
area code, and phone number.
•
If you make a mistake, tap
until the desired numbers have
been deleted.
3. Tap to make the call.
Manual Pause Dialing
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in
your Contacts list:
1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Press to display the dialer sub-menu.
3. Tap
Add 3-sec pause
to add a three-second pause, and
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.
Tip:
You can create pauses longer than three seconds by
entering multiple 3 sec pauses.
Call Functions 45
4. Select
Add wait
to add a wait. A wait will pause the
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a
key.
5. Tap to make the call.
For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers” on page 63.
Correcting an Entered Number
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when
dialing.
After entering a number using the keypad:
•
If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
•
Press and hold
to erase the entire string of numbers.
Ending a Call
Tap the key.
Dialing a Recent Number
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address
Book, the associated name also displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap Logs .
A list of recent calls is displayed.
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the
Details
page, then
tap to make a call.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your
Contacts List for speed dialing.
1. Tap ➔
Contacts
to display your Contacts List.
2. Press to display the Contacts List sub-menu.
3. Tap
Speed dial setting
.
4. The
Speed dial setting
screen displays showing the
numbers 1 through 9. The number 1 is reserved for
Voicemail.
5. Tap an unused number and the
Contacts
screen
displays.
6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected
contact number will display in the speed dial number
box.
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,
press to display the Speed Dial sub-menu.
8. Tap
Change order
or
Delete
.
Logs
46
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap ➔
Keypad
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial
number.
Making a Call from the Address Book
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are
collectively called the Address Book.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 64.
Answering a Call
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address
Book.
1. At the incoming call screen:
•
Touch and drag
in any direction to answer the call.
•
Touch and drag
in any direction to reject the call and
send it to your voicemail.
•
Touch and drag the
Reject call with message
tab upward and
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.
–
I am driving
–
I am at the cinema
–
I am in class
–
I am in a meeting
–
Sorry, I am busy. Call back later.
– or –
–
Tap
Create new message
to compose a new message.
2. Tap to end the call.
Call Functions 47
Note:
You can answer a call while using the Address Book or
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone
returns to the previously active function screen.
Dialing Options
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping
➔
Keypad
. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the
following tabs are located at the top of your screen:
•
Keypad
: dials the current number entered using the on-screen
keypad.
•
Logs
: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.
•
Favorites
: displays your contacts that you have marked as
Favorites. Also displays frequently called numbers.
After you begin to enter numbers, the
Add to Contacts
option
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.
Call Log
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the
details of the call.
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap Logs .
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls
are identified by the following icons:
Viewing Missed Calls from the Lock Screen
The number of calls you have missed is displayed on the
Home screen.
1. Touch the missed call icon with the number of missed
calls on it and move it in any direction.
•
Incoming Calls
:
•
Outgoing Calls
:
•
Missed Calls
:
•
Rejected Calls
:
•
Auto Rejected Calls
:
Logs
48
Note:
If there is a voicemail sent by the same number,
associated icons are displayed and can then be
selected.
2. The Call log is displayed. Missed calls are identified by
the
icon next to the number
.
Calling Back a Missed Call
To call back a missed call number:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
2. Tap the desired missed call. The call detail page is
displayed.
3. Tap .
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap
Create contact
to
add the call to your Address Book.
The Create contact screen is displayed.
– or –
If you want to replace the number for an existing
contact, tap
Update existing
.
Logs
Logs
Call Functions 49
4. Enter information into the various fields using the
keypad.
5. Tap at the top of the display to
select where you want the contact saved. It is saved to
the Phone by default.
6. Tap
Phone
,
SIM
, or account name.
7. Tap when you are finished to save the contact.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Adding a New Contact” on page 61.
Sending a Message to a Recent Call
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Tap the call you want to send a message to.
The call detail page is displayed.
3. Tap .
4. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.
5. When you are done with your message, tap Send.
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 95.
Deleting a Call from the Call Log
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call
log.
3. Tap Delete.
The call is deleted from the Call log.
Add as new
Call the number Send a message
contact Update an existing
contact
Phone
Logs
Logs
50
Adding a Call to the Reject List
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject
List.
3. Tap Add to reject list.
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent
to your voicemail.
Call Duration
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap Logs .
3. Press to display the Call log sub-menu.
4. Tap
Call duration
.
5. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
•Last call
: shows the length of time for the last call.
• Dialed calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
• Received calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls
received.
• All calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls made and
received.
6. You may reset these times to zero by pressing
then tapping
Reset
.
Options During a Call
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you
can use during a call.
Adjusting the Call Volume
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the
Volume
keys on the left side of the phone.
Press the
Up
volume key to increase the volume level
and press the
Down
volume key to decrease the
volume level.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume
using these same keys.
In-Call Options
During an active call there are several functions available by
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.
•
Hold
:
place the current active call on hold.
•
Add call
: displays the dialer so you can call another person.
•
Keypad
: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).
•
End call
: terminates the call.
Logs
Logs
Call Functions 51
•
Speaker
: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or
through the earpiece.
–
Tap
Speaker
to route the audio through the speaker. (You can
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line
will appear under the Speaker button.
–
Tap
Speaker
again
to use the phone’s earpiece (see
“Using
the Speakerphone During an Active Call”
on page 53). The
green line will turn grey when Speaker is not activated.
•
Mute/Unmute
turn the onboard microphone either on or off.
–
Tap
Mute
during a call to mute the microphone. A green line
will appear under the Mute button.
–
Tap
Mute
again to unmute the microphone. The green line will
turn grey when Mute is not activated.
•
Headset
connects to a Bluetooth headset.
–
Tap
Headset
during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A
green line will appear under the Headset button.
–
Tap
Headset
again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The
green line will turn grey when the Headset is not activated.
•
Press
for more options:
–
Contacts
: allows you to go to your Contact list.
–
Memo
: allows you to jot down a memo during a call.
–
Noise Suppression On/Off
: allows you to turn on the Noise
Suppression feature when you are in a noisy area. Turn it Off
when not needed to conserve battery power.
Placing a Call on Hold
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a
conversation. You can also make another call while you have
a call in progress if your network supports this service.
1. While on a call, tap Hold . This action places the
current caller on hold (which is displayed on-screen as
a greyed-out box).
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold.
To make a new call while you have a call in progress
1. Tap Hold .
2. Tap
Add call
to display the dialer.
3. Enter the new number and tap .
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large
box in the middle of your screen and the call on hold
will appear in a small box in the upper right corner of
your screen.
52
Switching Between Calls
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to
active and placing the other on hold.
1. Tap Swap.
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so
that you can continue conversing with that person. The
active call will appear in a green box.
2. Tap to end the currently active call.
To end a specific call
1. Tap
Swap
until the call you want to end appears in a
green box.
2. Tap to end the specific call.
3. Tap to end the remaining call.
To answer a call while you have a call in progress
1. Tap and slide to the right to answer another call.
2. Tap
Put "Number" on hold
to put the first call on hold.
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.
•Swap
: Places the current call on hold and then activates the
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap
Swap
again to switch back.
To end a call on hold
1. Tap to disconnect the active call.
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap
to end the call.
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
Note:
The Merge option combines all of the calls you have
established with your phone (both active and on hold).
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates
the previous call.
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.
1. Tap and slide to the right to answer the call.
Call Functions 53
2. Tap and slide to the right to answer the next call.
3. Tap
Put "Number" on hold
to put the first call on hold.
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by
tapping Merge.
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap
Hold
.
To rejoin the conference call tap
Unhold
.
6. Tap to end the call.
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the
speakerphone feature.
1. Tap
Speaker
.
The
Speaker
button now appears as and the
speakerphone is activated.
2. Use the
Volume
keys (located on the left side of your
phone) to adjust the volume.
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap
Speaker
.
Important!
For more information, see “Responsible Listening”
on page 200.
54
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so
that the other person cannot hear you.
Example:
You wish to say something to person in the room,
but do not want the person on the phone to hear
you.
To mute your phone during a call
1. Tap Mute .
The
Mute
button now appears as and Mute is
activated.
2. Tap Mute to deactivate the Mute function and
reactivate the microphone.
Bluetooth headset
1. Tap Headset .
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When
found, connect to the headset.
The
Headset
button now appears as and the
Bluetooth headset is activated.
3. Tap Headset to deactivate the Bluetooth
headset and reactivate the phone speaker.
Searching for a Number in Address Book
1. During the active call, press then tap
Contacts
.
2. Tap the Address Book entry.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 64.
Call Waiting
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is
supported by the network, and you must first activate the
Call Waiting feature:
Tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Additional settings
➔
Call waiting
.
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
Mute
Mute
Mute
Headset
Headset
Headset
Entering Text 55
Section 4: Entering Text
This section describes how to select the desired text input
method when entering characters into your phone. This
section also describes the predictive text entry system that
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering
text.
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when
entering text.
Text Input Methods
There are three text input methods available:
•
Android keyboard (default)
: an on-screen QWERTY keypad
that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.
•
Google voice typing
: uses Google voice recognition to
convert your spoken words into on-screen text.
•
Samsung Keypad
: Samsung’s on-screen QWERTY keypad
that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.
•
Swype
: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input
Methods” on page 128.
Entering Text Using the Android
Keyboard
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad will display.
New
Paragraph
Text Input Mode
Shift
Key Delete
Key
Space Bar
Google Voice
Typing
56
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.
The available Text Input modes are:
Sym
and
Abc
.
Note:
When in
Abc
mode, the
Sym
button will appear. When in
Sym
mode, the
Abc
/
ABC
/
abc
button will appear.
Using ABC Mode
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a
Landscape orientation.
2. When you tap the
Tap to enter message
field, the
following screen displays:
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the
first letter, the shift key ( ) will change to
and following letters will be lowercase.
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will
change to in ABC mode. All following letters
will be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.
Symbol/Numeric Mode
: activates the number,
symbol, and emoticon keys.
ABC Mode
: activates the default alphabet keys.
Can also be set to
Abc
or
abc
by using the shift
() key.
?123
ABC
Entering Text 57
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons.
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape
orientation.
2. Tap at the bottom of the screen. The following
screen displays:
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon
characters.
4. Tap the button to access additional symbols.
5. Tap to return to Abc mode.
Show Correction Suggestions
By using the Show Correction Suggestions option, you can
have next-letter prediction and regional error correction,
which compensates for pressing the wrong keys on the
QWERTY keyboard.
1. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of
the words to replace the word that has already been
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more
word choices.
2. Continue typing your message. Tap
Send
to send the
message or press for more options. For more
information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages”
on page 95.
?123
=\<
ABC
58
Note:
You can also use XT9 mode in the portrait orientation.
Entering Text Using the Samsung
Keypad
The Samsung Keypad is an on-screen QWERTY keypad
similar to the Android Keyboard with several minor
differences.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and
drag down from the Notifications area then tap
Select input method
.
2. Tap the
Samsung keypad
radio button. It will turn green.
The Samsung keypad is displayed.
Samsung Keypad Settings
For information on changing Samsung Keypad settings, see
“Samsung Keypad settings” on page 129.
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text
system.
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.
Enabling and Configuring Swype
The Samsung keypad is the default text input method, so to
use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard
setting.
To enable Swype:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and
drag down from the Notifications area then tap
Select input method
.
2. Tap the
Swype
radio button. It will turn green.
Entering Text 59
The Swype keyboard is displayed.
Swype Settings
For information on how you can configure your Swype
settings, see “Swype Settings” on page 131
Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following
Swype text entry tips.
•
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such
as pp in apple).
•
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
•
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
•
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.
Google Voice Typing
This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your
spoken words into on-screen text.
Configuring Google Voice Typing
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap .
2. The virtual keyboard is then removed and all
subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to
speech.
3. Select a language by tapping at the bottom of the
Listening
area.
•
Tap
Add more languages
to assign a new language via the
Google voice typing menu.
•
Removing the check mark from the
Automatic
field allows you
to select additional languages.
Using Google Voice Typing
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap .
2. At the
Listening
prompt, speak into the device’s
microphone and watch your text being entered on-
screen.
3. If the text is incorrect, tap the
DELETE
box.
4. Once you have completed entering your message, tap
Done
.
60
Note:
This feature works best when you break your message
down into smaller segments.
Contacts and Your Address Book 61
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.
Note:
When storing an Address Book entry into your SIM card,
note that only the name, phone number, group, and slot
location are initially offered as fields (some SIM cards
may allow an address as well). Although you may add
additional fields to a SIM entry; if you move that same
SIM card to another model phone, it is possible that only
the basic information will be transferred.
AT&T Address Book Activation
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized
between your phone and online address book. The changes
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your
contacts onto your new phone.
To activate the AT&T Address Book:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
Your Address Book is displayed.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your
online AT&T Address Book recently, the
AT&T Address
Book
screen is displayed. Tap
Yes
if you want to
synchronize your Address Book.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make
a call or send a message through your Address Book.
You can also manage your Address Book on the web
at
http://www.att.com/addressbook
.
Adding a New Contact
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your
Address Book.
Saving a Number from the Home screen
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
.
2. Tap at the top of the display to
select where you want the contact saved. It is saved to
the Phone by default.
Phone
62
3. Tap
Phone
,
SIM
, or account name.
4. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new
entry by choosing one of three options:
•Take photo
: use the camera to take a new picture and assign it
to this entry, then tap
Save
.
• Select picture from Gallery
: retrieve a previously stored image
from your Pictures folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap
Save
.
• Remove photo
: although not an option with a new entry,
deletes any previously assigned image on an existing contact.
5. Tap the
Name
field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter the full name. For more information, refer to
“Entering Text” on page 55.
– or –
Tap next to the
Name
field to display additional
name fields.
6. Tap the
Phone number
field.
The numerical keypad is displayed.
The
Mobile
button initially displays next to the
Phone number
field. If you want to add a phone number
that is not a mobile number, tap the
Mobile
button and
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.
7. Enter the phone number.
Tap to add another Phone number field or tap
to delete a field.
8. Tap the
Address
field.
The keypad is displayed.
The
Home
button initially displays next to the
Address
field. If you want to add an address that is not
a Home address, tap the
Home
button and select from
Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add your own label).
9. Enter the address.
Tap to add another address field or tap to
delete a field.
10. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to
your new contact:
Mobile
Home
Contacts and Your Address Book 63
•Events
: tap to add a Birthday, Anniversary, Other event, or
Custom event.
• Groups
: assign the contact to Co-workers, Family, or Friends
group.
•Ringtone
: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will
sound when messages are received from this contact. Choose
between Default, Ringtones, or Go to My files.
•Add another field
:
tap this button to add another field such as
Phonetic name, Organization, Email, IM, Notes, Nickname,
Website, or Relationship.
11. Tap to save the new contact.
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers
When you call automated systems, you are often required to
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you
enter a number or press a key.
To add a pause or a wait to a Contact:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
, and
then tap the name or number to open the Contact.
2. Tap to edit.
3. Tap the phone number field.
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait
needs to be added.
5. Tap .
6. Tap
Pause
to add a two-second pause or tap
Wait
to
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional
numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and
a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).
7. Tap to save your changes, or tap to discard.
Editing an Existing Contact
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and
change or delete the information, or you can add additional
fields to the contact’s list of information.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit.
2. Tap
Edit
.
#
64
3. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete
information.
4. Tap to save the edited information.
Using Contacts
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM
card location number or by using the Search field to locate
the entry.
From the Address book, you can also send messages.
Finding an Address Book Entry
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a
single entity, called the Address Book.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how
they are stored may differ.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to
the contacts beginning with that letter.
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.
Contacts and Your Address Book 65
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the
message icon to send a message.
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 95.
Tip:
From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.
Joining Contacts
Joining Contact Information
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge
these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her
entries and view the information in one record.
The next time you synchronize your phone with your
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your
contacts list.
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 67.
66
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to
another entry). Typically, this is the same contact with
a different name or account information.
3. Press ➔
Join contact
.
The contact list is displayed.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to
join). The second contact is now joined with the first
and the account information is merged into one screen.
Note:
The information is still maintained in both entries, but
displays in one record for easier viewing when you join
the contacts.
5. Tap the
Connections
bar to view the contact information
you joined. The contacts and information displays with
an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type
of account information is contained in the entry.
Unjoining a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
want to unlink an entry).
Note
: typically this is the same
contact with a different name or account information.
3. Tap the
Connections
bar.
4. Tap the minus sign next to entry in which you
want to unjoin. The contact is now separated and no
longer displays in the merged record screen.
Marking a Contact as Default
When you use messaging type applications, the application
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be
looking for the “default” number or entry.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Tap a Contact name.
Contacts and Your Address Book 67
3. Press ➔
Mark as default
. The Mark as default
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.
The radio button next to the default contact will be
green.
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next
to another entry that you want to be the default. The
radio button will turn green, then tap to save your
changes.
Synchronizing Accounts
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts
list.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Press then tap
Accounts
.
3. Tap
Sync all
to synchronize all accounts.
– or –
Tap next to the account you want to sync, then tap
Sync Now
.
The accounts are synchronized.
Address Book Options
You can access Address Book options while at the main
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific
entry.
Options in Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
then
press .
2. The following options are displayed:
• Delete:
allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• SIM Management
: allows you to copy contacts from your
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.
•Import/Export
: allows you to move contacts to or from your
memory card. You can also send a namecard via Bluetooth,
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Merge with Google
: allows you to merge your contacts
together with your Google account contacts.
• Accounts
: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on
Facebook, Google, and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. Tap
Add account and then follow the on-screen instructions.
68
• Speed dial setting
: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For
more information, refer to “Making a Call Using Speed Dial” on
page 41.
•Send email
: allows you to send an email using your Google
account.
• Send message
: allows you to send a text or picture message.
• Contacts to display
: You can choose to display all of your
contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or
contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customize
to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.
• Settings
: allows you to choose set the following options:
–
Only contacts with phones
: allows you to only display
contacts that have phone numbers.
–
Sort list by
: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.
–
Display contacts by
: allows you to sort by First name first or
Last name first.
–
Service numbers
: allows you to
display or edit your service
numbers.
–
Send contact
: allows you to send contacts via Bluetooth in the
form of namecards.
–
AT&T Address Book
: allows you to access the AT&T Address
Book so you can sync your contacts.
Options at Selected Contact Screen
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press
.
3. The following options are displayed:
•History
: allows you to view the phone and message history for
the contact.
•Delete
: allows you to delete the contact from your Address
Book.
•Join contact
: allows you to join contacts with other contacts
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).
• Mark as default
: when you have multiple contacts linked
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,
refer to
“Marking a Contact as Default”
on page 66.
• Share namecard via
: allows you to send the contact’s
information via Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi
Direct.
Contacts and Your Address Book 69
• Add to/Remove from reject list
: allows you to add or remove
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.
• Print namecard
: allows you to print the contact’s namecard to
a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.
Groups
Adding an Entry to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Press and hold the contact name that you want to add
to a group.
3. Tap
Add to group
.
A list of groups is displayed.
4. Tap a group entries that you want to add the contact to.
A checkmark will appear.
5. Tap to save.
The contact is added to the group.
Removing an Entry From a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press ➔
Remove member
.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their
name.
5. Tap to remove.
The contacts are now removed from the group.
Creating a New Group
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
Groups
➔ ➔
New
.
2. Tap the
Group name
field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a new group name. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 55.
3. Tap
Group ringtone
to choose an audio file for
assignment to this new group. Choose from
Default
,
Ringtones
, or
Go to My files
.
4. Tap
Add member
to add contacts to the new group.
5. Tap to save the new Group category.
Groups
Groups
70
Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as
part of the selected group.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press ➔
Edit
.
4. Make modifications to the
Group name
or
Group
ringtone
fields.
5. Tap
Add member
to add more contacts to this group.
6. Tap to save your changes.
Address Book Favorites
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can add them to your Favorites list.
To view your Favorites list:
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
Favorites
.
Adding Favorites to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to add to your favorites list.
3. Tap
Add to favorites
on the displayed list.
4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the
Address Book.
Removing Favorites from your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in
your Favorites list will have a gold star.
3. Tap
Remove from favorites
on the displayed list.
4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact
in the Address Book.
Managing Address Book Entries
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the
Phone and SIM entries on your phone.
Groups
Favor ite s
Contacts and Your Address Book 71
Copying an Entry to the SIM Card
Note:
When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,
note that only the name, phone number, group, and slot
location are initially offered as fields (some SIM cards
may allow an address as well). To save additional
information for a particular contact, such as other phone
numbers, or e-mail, it is important to add new fields to
that Contact information. It is also important to note that
if you move the SIM card to another phone that does not
support additional fields on the SIM card, this additional
information may not be available.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
➔
SIM Management
.
2. Tap
Copy Contacts to SIM
.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap
Select all
to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap to copy.
5. At the
Copy to SIM
display, tap
OK
.
6. At the
Copy Successful
display, tap
OK
.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.
Copying an Entry to the Phone
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
➔
SIM Management
.
2. Tap
Copy Contacts from SIM
.
3. At the
Create contact under account
prompt, tap
Phone
,
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
or an account name.
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts
stored on your SIM card.
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to
your phone or tap
Select all
to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
5. Tap to copy.
6. At the
Copy Successful
display, tap
OK
.
The selected numbers are copied to your phone.
72
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card
1. From the Home screen, tap
Contacts
➔ ➔
SIM Management
.
2. Tap
Delete Contacts from SIM
.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap
Select all
to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap to delete.
5. At the
Delete contacts from SIM
display, tap
OK
.
6. At the
Delete Successful
display, tap
OK
.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.
Deleting Address Book Entries
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s
memory.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to delete.
3. Tap
Delete
on the displayed list.
4. At the
Delete
prompt, tap
OK
to delete the contact or
Cancel
to exit.
Using the Service Dialing Numbers
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and
directory inquiries.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
➔
➔
Settings
.
2. Tap
Service numbers
.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).
4. Tap a number to call.
Note:
This menu is available only when your SIM card
supports Service Dialing Numbers.
Multimedia 73
Section 6: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of
your phone, including Media Hub, Music Player, Google Play
Music, Live TV, Qik Lite, Video Player, Google Play Movies,
Video Maker, Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder.
Media Hub
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your
fingertips, entertaining yourself or your kids on the go has
never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere.
Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known
for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like
you've never experienced it before.
Note:
Media Hub usage is based on service availability.
Using Media Hub
1. Tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
➔
Unknown sources
to
create a checkmark and allow the Samsung app to run.
2. At the informational prompt, tap
OK
.
3. Press ➔ ➔
Media Hub
.
4. If do not have the Samsung Account App yet, an
Attention
prompt will display. Tap
OK
.
5. Tap
Install
. You will only need to do this once.
6. Tap
Done
.
7. Read the
Terms and Conditions
screen and tap the
I
agree to the Terms and Conditions
checkbox.
8. Tap
Accept
to continue or
Decline
to exit.
9. At the Media Hub screen,
What’s New
is displayed with
recently added media that you can rent or purchase.
10. Tap for the following options:
•Movies
: displays movies that are available for rent or purchase.
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie
category. The movies of that type will be displayed below.
• TV Shows
: displays TV shows that are available for purchase.
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a TV category.
The TV shows of that type will be displayed below.
•My Media
: allows you to view all of the media that you have
purchased or rented. Tap a media entry to view it.
74
11. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item
you would like to purchase or rent.
12. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Samsung
account and make a purchase.
13. The media will be stored in the My Media folder.
Media Hub Notices
•
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
you create an account in Media Hub.
•
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to
the same account.
•
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more
than once every 90 days.
•
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download
availability and studio permissions.
•
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you
have acquired through the Service.
•
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download
Media Content.
•
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account.
•
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.
•
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
•
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
Media Content has been buffered.
•
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24
consecutive hours of start of playback.
•
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
•
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
Multimedia 75
•
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.
Music Player
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.
The music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger
than 300 KB are displayed).
Playing Music
1. Tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (All,
Playlists, Albums, Artists, or Folders) to view the
available music files.
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to
begin playback.
4. The following Music Player controls are available:
Music Player Options
To access additional options, follow these steps:
1. While in the Music Player, press .
2. The follow options are available:
Pause the song.
Start the song after being paused.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go
to next song.
Volume control.
Repeat one: repeats the currently playing song.
Repeat all: replays the current list when the list
ends.
Play All: plays the current song list once.
Shuffle On: the current list of songs are randomly
shuffled for playback.
Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not
shuffled.
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual
Surround Sound.
Displays your list of songs.
5.1Ch
( ( ) )
List
76
• Add to quick list
: adds the current music file to the Quick list.
• Via Bluetooth
: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth
headset.
•Share music via
: allows you to share your music by using
AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
•Set as:
allows you to set a music file to Phone ringtone, Caller
ringtone, or Alarm tone.
• Add to playlist:
allows you to add the current music file to a
selected playlist.
• Settings
: allows you to change your music player settings. For
more information, refer to
“Music Player Settings”
on
page 76.
•Details
: allows you to view media info such as Title, Biography,
Discography, and other information.
Music Player Settings
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set
preferences for the music player such as whether you want
the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how
the music menu displays.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Press ➔
Settings
.
3. Select one of the following settings:
•Equalizer
: set a type of equalization. Selections are: Auto,
Normal, Pop, Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, Live, or Custom.
• Sound effects
: configure the music effects. Selections are:
Normal, Wide, Concert Hall, Music clarity, Bass enhancement,
or Externalization.
• Music menu
: this menu allows you to select which categories
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,
Folders, Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or
Recently added. Tap each item that you want to display in the
Music menu.
•Visualization
: when activated the music player displays an
animated display.
•Lyrics
: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if
available.
• Music auto off
: when activated, music will automatically turn
off after a set interval.
Multimedia 77
Using Playlists
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music
Player options menu or from within a 3rd party music
application (such as Windows Media Player) and then
downloaded to the handset.
Creating a Playlist
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap the
Playlists
tab.
3. Press ➔
Create
.
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap
Save
.
Adding Music to a Playlist
To add files to the playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap the
Playlists
tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
4. Tap
Add music
.
5. Tap a music file, or tap
Select all
to add all the music
tracks to this playlist then tap
Add
.
Removing Music from a Playlist
To remove music files from a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap the
Playlists
tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
4. Press ➔
Remove
.
5. Tap the checkbox to the right of each track you want to
remove from this playlist, or tap
Select all
to remove all
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap
Remove
.
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you
can also rename the playlist.
To edit a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Music Player
.
2. Tap
Playlists
.
3. Press ➔
Edit title
.
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.
5. Tap the
Name
field for the selected playlist, enter a new
name for the playlist then tap
Save
.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see
“Play Store” on page 176
78
Google Play Music
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Play Music
.
All music on your device and external SD card is
displayed including Music folders that may contain
multiple songs.
2. Tap a song to start playback.
3. From the main Play Music screen, you can tap any of
the following tabs for a more detailed listing of songs:
Recent, Artists, Albums, Songs, Playlists, and Genres.
4. Tap for the following options:
• Shuffle all
: allows you to play all of your music in a shuffled
order.
• Settings
: allows you to view Open source licenses and the
music version for the Play Music application.
•Help
: allows you to view a help file on the Google Support
website.
Live TV
AT&T U-verse Live TV is a subscription service that allows
you to watch your favorite TV shows using your handset.
1. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
2. Tap ➔
Live TV
.
Note:
The first time you use Live TV, you will need to download
the application from the Play Store. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 176.
3. Read the
Terms and Conditions
and tap
Accept
to
continue or
Exit
to exit.
4. Tap
Purchase Options
and follow the on-screen
instructions to start your subscription.
Note:
Live TV will use a large amount of data and you are
responsible for all data charges. It is strongly
recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan in
addition to this purchase.
Multimedia 79
5. When the Live TV main page displays, follow the on-
screen instructions to watch TV.
Qik Lite
Qik Lite is a mobile video sharing service that lets you record
and share experiences with your friends, family, and your
favorite social networks. Your video is automatically saved as
you record. You can also use Qik Lite to Video Chat with your
friends.
1. You will need to sign onto a Wi-Fi network first in order
to use Qik Lite. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi”
on page 146.
2. Tap ➔
Qik Lite
.
3. The first time you access Qik Lite, tap
Get started!
to
create your Qik account and follow the on-screen
prompts. The instructions will help you download the
app from the Play Store. Otherwise, tap
Already a Qik
user?
.
4. Tap the
username
and
password
fields and enter your
information, then tap
Login
.
Note:
The first time you use Qik Lite, you will need to
download the application from the Play Store. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 176.
5. Select one of the following options and follow the
on-screen instructions. For more information, visit
http://qik.com/
.
•Video Chat
: allows you to participate in two-way video chats.
• Record & Share
: allows you to record videos and have them
instantly uploaded to the web for sharing or safe-keeping.
• Video Mail
: allows you to send videos by email.
• Video Gallery
: allows you to see all of your videos.
Using Video Chat
To use Video Chat, you and the person you want to Video
Chat with must have a Qik Video account and be signed in.
1. Tap ➔
Qik Lite
.
2. Sign on to your Qik Video account and tap
Video Chat
.
3. At the Video Chat screen, tap
Dialpad
, then enter the
phone number or the Qik user name of the person you
want to Video Chat with.
4. Tap
Start Video Chat
.
LITE
LITE
80
Note:
If the contact is not a Qik user, you have the option to
send them a video mail. Tap Yes to continue, then tap
Record new or Browse Gallery.
5. To end the Video Chat, tap
End Chat
.
Video Player
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your
microSD card.
1. Tap ➔
Video Player
.
2. All videos that you have on your memory card will be
displayed. Tap the video that you want to play.
3. The video will begin to play.
4. The following video controls are available:
Note:
The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the
icon is tapped.
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,
see “Play Store” on page 176.
Pause the video.
Start the video after being paused.
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to
go to previous video.
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.
Tap to go to next video.
Volume control.
Original size view. T
he video will be played in
its original size.
Full-screen in ratio view. T
he video is
enlarged as much as possible without
becoming distorted.
Full-screen view. T
he entire screen is used,
which may cause some minor distortion.
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1
Virtual Surround Sound.
Allows you to share the video using the
AllShare app.
5.1Ch
( ( ) )
Multimedia 81
Play Movies
With Google Play Movies, you can rent thousands of different
movies. You can watch instantly, or download your movie for
offline viewing at a later time.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Play Movies
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and
viewing movies.
Video Maker
Video Maker allows you to custom-make your own videos.
You can add themes, music, pictures, and other videos to you
video.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Video Maker
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message.
1. Tap ➔
Gallery
.
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will
be displayed with folder name and number of files.
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be
displayed.
Note:
If your device displays that the memory is full when you
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using
My Files
or other file management applications and try again. For
more information, refer to “My Files” on page 172.
Viewing Pictures
1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture.
Note:
If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
2. The following options are available:
• Send via
: allows you to send the picture via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete
: allows you to delete the picture. Tap
Confirm deletions
and the picture will be deleted.
82
3. Press for additional options:
•Share via
: allows you to share the picture via AllShare,
Facebook, Google+, Picasa, or Social Hub.
•Set as
: allows you to set the picture as a Contact icon, Home
screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.
•More
: displays additional options for editing and printing.
Viewing Videos
Note:
If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
1. Touch and hold a video to select it. A checkmark will
appear on the thumbnail.
2. The following options are available:
•Send via
: allows you to share the video via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
•Delete
: allows you to delete the video. Tap
Confirm deletions
and the video will be deleted.
•More
: displays the following additional options:
–
Share via:
allows you to share a video via Facebook or
YouTube.
–
Play via:
allows you to play a video via AllShare.
–
Rename:
allows you to rename a video.
–
Details
: provides details about the picture such as Title, Type,
Date taken, name of the Album it is in, Location, Latitude and
Longitude (GPS coordinates), Size, Resolution, Duration, and File
location.
3. Tap a thumbnail to play the video.
For video player controls, see “Video Player” on
page 80.
Camera
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-
in camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces
photos in JPEG format.
Important!
Do not take photos of people without their
permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are
not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may
interfere with another person’s privacy.
Multimedia 83
Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then
pressing the camera key.
Note:
When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Camera
to
activate the camera mode.
Note:
The main Home screen initially contains the
Camera
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access the camera
from another Home screen, you must tap
Applications
➔
Camera
.
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
3. Before you take a picture, use the
Up
and
Down
Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up
to x4 (400 percent).
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap
on-screen icons to access various camera options and
settings.
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the
area you touch.
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.
(The picture is automatically stored within your
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,
all pictures are stored on the Phone.) For more
information, refer to “Camera Options” on page 84.
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, tap
to zoom in or to zoom out.
– or –
Display Image
Settings
Storage Location
Camera
Key
Image
Viewer
Mode
Front
Flash
Facing
Camera
84
Tap each side of the picture and swipe outward or
inward to zoom in or out.
You can magnify the picture up to x4.
8. Press to return to the viewfinder.
Camera Options
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the
screen.
Camera / Camcorder Mode
: allows you to take a photo
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for
Camcorder.
Self portrait
: allows you to set the front camera so you
can take pictures of yourself or video chat.
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or
Auto flash.
A
Settings:
Edit shortcuts
: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
Self-portrait
: allows you to set the front camera so you
can take pictures of yourself or video chat.
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or
Auto flash.
Shooting mode
: allows you to set the shooting mode.
Options are:
•
Single shot
: takes a single photo and view it before
returning to the shooting mode.
•
Smile shot
: the camera focuses on the face of your
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s
smile, it takes the picture.
•
Beauty
: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial
features.
Multimedia 85
•
Panorama
: takes a landscape photo by taking an
initial photo and then adding additional images to
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where
the second part of the panoramic picture should
fall within.
•
Action shot
: detects action and creates a
panorama of the moving object.
•
Cartoon
: gives your photo a cartoon look.
Scene mode
: allows you to set the Scene to help take the
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,
Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,
Sunset, Dawn, Fall Color, Firework, Text, Candlelight,
and Backlight. Helpful tips are shown for each scene
mode at the bottom of the display screen.
Exposure value
: allows you to adjust the brightness
level by moving the slider.
Focus mode
: allows you to set this option to Auto focus,
Macro, or Face detection. Use Macro mode to take
close-up pictures. Face detection causes the camera to
automatically recognize if there is a face in the shot. It
then optimizes the focus and exposure the face. Use
Auto focus for all others.
Timer
: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5
sec, and 10 sec.
Effects
: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the photo. Options include: None,
Negative, Grayscale, and Sepia.
Resolution
: allows you to set the image size to either:
8M (3264x2448), W6.5M (3264x1968),
3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M (2048x1232),
W0.4M (800x480), or 0.3M (640x480).
White balance
: allows you to set this option to one of the
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
86
ISO
: ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on
your digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400,
or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera
less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take
photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera
automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
Metering
: allows you to set how the camera measures
or meters the light source: Centre-weighted, Spot, or
Matrix.
Outdoor visibility
: allows you to take better pictures
when outdoors.
Anti-Shake
: reduces image blur due to the movement
of the subject of the photo or hand movement.
Auto contrast
: provides a clear image even under
backlight circumstances where intensity of
illumination can vary excessively.
Blink detection
: detects the blinking of human eyes and
gives you a warning.
Guidelines
: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.
Image quality
: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
GPS tag
: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in
Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag
(Geotagging), from the Home screen tap ➔
Settings ➔ Location services and tap GPS satellites to
create a checkmark.
Shutter sound
: allows you to set the Shutter sound to On
or Off.
Storage
: allows you to configure the default storage
location for images or videos as either Phone or
Memory card (if inserted).
Reset
: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder
settings to the default values.
Multimedia 87
Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options
After you take a photo or shoot a video, you can access
various options from the Pictures and Videos Image Viewer.
Available options are:
•
Share
: offers several ways to share your picture or video. Options
are: AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+,
Messaging, Photo Editor, Picasa, Social Hub, and Wi-Fi Direct.
•
Delete
: allows you to delete the current picture. Tap
OK
to delete
or
Cancel
.
•
More
: allows you to do the following:
–
Set as
: allows you to assign the current image as either your
current Wallpaper or as a Contact icon to display for a specific
entry within your Address Book.
–
Rename
: allows you to rename a picture.
•
Return to previous page
( ): takes you back to the previously
active camera page where you can take another photo or shoot a
new video.
Accessing Pictures
When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Camera
folder. You can view your pictures immediately or view them
anytime in the Camera folder.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
My Files
➔
DCIM
➔
Camera
.
2. Tap a photo file to open it in the Image viewer.
Sweep the screen to the left to see the next picture or to the
right to see the previous picture.
Image viewer
: allows you to access the Image viewer
and the various viewing options for a selected picture.
Image viewer options are described in the following
section. The last picture you took, will be displayed as
a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.
Share Return to
previous page
More
Image or Video
Delete
88
Before you select a picture, press in the Camera folder
to see the following options:
•
Share
: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Bluetooth,
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Photo Editor,
Picasa, Social Hub, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.
•
Create folder
: create a new sub-folder in the current folder. Can
be on either the Phone or Memory Card.
•
Delete
: allows you to delete selected pictures. Tap the
checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to
delete, then tap Delete.
•
View by
: allows you to view the contents of the current folder as
a list, as a list and details, or as thumbnails.
•
Sort by
: allows you to view the contents of the current folder
sorted by Time, Type, Name, or Size.
•
Move
: allows you to move one or more pictures to a different
folder.
•
Copy
: allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different
folder.
•
Rename
: allows you to rename one or more picture files.
•
Settings
: lets you set several general folder options:
–
Show hidden files
: causes files and folders that would normally
be hidden to be displayed.
–
Show file extension
: causes file extensions to be displayed. For
example, jpg.
–
Set Home directory
: allows you to choose and set the Home
directory.
Selecting and Using Pictures
From the Image viewer, you have access to both macro
functions (zoom, crop, and rotate) and menu options. For
more information, refer to “Pictures and Videos Image Viewer
Options” on page 87.
Editing a Photo
You can edit your photos using the Photo Editor application
on your phone. For more information, refer to “Photo Editor”
on page 93.
Assigning an Image to an Address Book Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
My Files
➔
DCIM
➔
Camera
➔
<image>
.
2. Tap
➔
Set as
➔
Contact photo
.
3. Tap a contact entry.
4. Touch and drag the orange crop box anywhere on the
picture.
Multimedia 89
5. Tap
Save
.
For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your
Address Book” on page 61.
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
My Files
➔
DCIM
➔
Camera
➔
<image>
.
2. Tap ➔
Set as
➔
Home screen wallpaper
.
– or –
Tap ➔
Set as
➔
Lock screen wallpaper
.
3. Touch and drag the orange crop box anywhere on the
picture.
4. Tap
Save
to assign the wallpaper image. Tap
Cancel
to
stop without updating the wallpaper image.
Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send
videos.
Note:
The camera may not be able to properly record videos to
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.
Shooting Video
Tip:
When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your
subject with sufficient light by having the light source
behind you.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Camera
to
activate the camera mode.
2. Touch and drag the Camera mode button down to
Camcorder Mode.
3. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the
subject.
4. Before you take a video, use the
Up
and
Down
Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up
to x4 (400 percent).
5. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red
light will blink while recording.
6. Tap the Video key ( ) again to stop the recording and
save the video file to your Camera folder.
90
7. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,
then tap to play your video for review.
8. Press to return to the viewer.
Camcorder Options
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the
screen.
Camera / Camcorder Mode
: allows you to take a photo
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for
Camcorder.
Recording mode
: allows you to set the recording mode
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on
the destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited
by MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which
activates the front-facing camera so you can video
yourself.
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually
while you are taking a video.
Settings:
Edit shortcuts
: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
Flash
: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually
while you are taking a video.
Recording mode
: allows you to set the recording mode
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on
the destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited
by MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which
activates the front-facing camera so you can video
yourself.
Exposure value
: allows you to adjust the brightness
level by moving the slider.
Timer
: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
before taking a video. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec,
and 10 sec.
Effects
: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the photo. Options include: None,
Negative, Grayscale, and Sepia.
Multimedia 91
Camcorder Options after a Video is Taken
After you shoot a video, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer.
The following options are available:
•
Share
: offers several ways to share your video. Options are:
AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Messaging, Wi-Fi
Direct, and YouTube.
•
Delete
: allows you to delete the current video. Tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
.
•
More
: allows you to access the following additional options:
–
Play
: allows you to play the video
–
Rename
: allows you to rename the video.
Accessing Videos
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera
folder. You can view your videos immediately or view them
anytime in the Camera folder.
Resolution
: allows you to set the image size to either:
1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, 320x240,
or 176x144.
White balance
: allows you to set this option to one of the
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
Outdoor visibility
: allows you to take better pictures
when outdoors. Options are Off or On.
Video quality
: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
Guidelines
: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.
Storage
: allows you to configure the default storage
location for images or videos as either Phone or
Memory card (if inserted).
Reset
: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder
settings to the default values.
Image viewer
: allows you to access the Image viewer
and the various viewing options for a selected video.
Image viewer options are described in the following
section. The last video you took, will be displayed as a
thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.
92
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
My Files
➔
DCIM
➔
Camera
.
2. Tap a video file to open it in the viewer and initiate
playback.
3. To pause the video, tap . To play the video, tap .
Before you select a video to play, press in the Camera
folder to see the following options:
•
Share
: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Bluetooth,
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Photo Editor,
Picasa, Social Hub, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.
•
Create folder
: create a new sub-folder in the current folder. Can
be on either the Phone or Memory Card.
•
Delete
: allows you to delete selected videos. Tap the checkmark,
to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to delete, then
tap Delete.
•
View by
: allows you to view the contents of the current folder as
a list, as a list and details, or as thumbnails.
•
Sort by
: allows you to view the contents of the current folder
sorted by Time, Type, Name, or Size.
•
Move
: allows you to move one or more videos to a different
folder.
•
Copy
: allows you to copy one or more videos to a different folder.
•
Rename
: allows you to rename one or more video files.
•
Settings
: lets you set several general folder options:
–
Show hidden files
: causes files and folders that would normally
be hidden to be displayed.
–
Show file extension
: causes file extensions to be displayed. For
example, 3gp.
–
Set Home directory
: allows you to choose and set the Home
directory.
While you are playing a video, press to display the
following options:
•
Share via
: lets you share the video with AllShare, Bluetooth,
Facebook, Wi-Fi Direct, Messaging, YouTube, Email, or Gmail.
•
Video brightness
: allows you to set the brightness for a video
that is playing. You can also select Automatic brightness.
•
Via Bluetooth
: scans for a Bluetooth device on which to play the
video.
•
Subtitles
: allows you to view subtitles if they are present in the
video.
•
Color tone
: allows you to set the color tone of a video to Normal,
Warm, or Cold.
Multimedia 93
•
Outdoor visibility
: allows you to turn view videos outside. Select
On or Off.
•
Details
: displays file information such as file name, format,
resolution, file size, date & time, and forwarding capability.
While viewing a video, you can also adjust the screen view.
Screen view allows you to select Original Size, Full-Screen,
or Full-Screen in Ratio to view your video.
Note:
The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the
icon is tapped.
•
AllShare
: ( ) allows you to share the video using the AllShare
app.
•
5.1 Ch.
: ( )
allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual
Surround Sound.
•
Original Size
: ( ) the video will be played in its original size.
•
Full-Screen in Ratio View
: ( ) the video is enlarged as much
as possible without becoming distorted.
•
Full-Screen View
: (
)
the entire screen is used, which may
cause some minor distortion.
•
Pause/Resume
: tap
to pause the video being played.
Tap
to
resume playing.
•
Previous/Next
:
tap
to jump to the previously played video
or tap
to jump to
the next video file in the Camera folder.
•
Exit
: to return to the videos list, tap the icon in the top right
corner of the screen.
Photo Editor
The Photo Editor application provides basic editing functions
for pictures that you take on your phone. Along with basic
image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also
provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Photo Editor
.
2. Tap
Select picture
to edit a picture in your Gallery.
– or –
Tap
Capture picture
to take a picture with the camera.
3. Tap the picture and it is loaded into the Photo Editor.
5.1Ch
( ( ) )
94
4. Use the following Photo Editor controls to edit your
picture:
5. Press to access the following options:
•New
: starts a new Photo Editor project. Be sure and save the
photo you are working on before starting a new project.
•Save
: saves your photo to your gallery.
•Share
: allows you to share your photo via AllShare, Bluetooth,
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picasa, Social
Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Selection Size
: allows you to set the size of the
selection tool to Small, Medium, or Large.
Selection
: use the selection tool to mark an area
for cropping, rotating, etc.
Crop
: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a
photo.
Rotate
: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.
Move
: use the move feature to move a photo
around when you are zoomed in and the entire
photo is not showing on the screen.
Tools
: allows you to Copy and Paste to different
images. You can also use Warping and Fill.
Effects
: allows you to add various effects to your
photo.
Color
: allows you to adjust the Saturation,
Contrast, Brightness of a photo. You can also
make it Grey-scale.
Next
: move to next photo project.
Previous
: move to previous photo project.
Messaging 95
Section 7: Messaging
This section describes how to send and receive different
types of messages. It also includes the features and
functionality associated with messaging.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
•
Text Messages
•
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
•
Email and Gmail Messages
•
Google Talk
•
Google +
•
Messenger
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s message service.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s multimedia message service.
Important!
When creating a message, adding an image, a
sound file, or a video clip to a text message
changes the message from a text message to a
multimedia message.
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For
more information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 21.
Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
➔
New message
.
Note:
The main Home screen initially contains the
Messaging
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap
Applications
➔
Messaging
.
2. Tap on the
Enter recipient
field to manually enter a
recipient or tap to select a recipient from your
Contacts.
96
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the
contact to place a checkmark then tap .
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.
Note:
For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted
entries.
Note:
Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.
4. Tap the
Tap to enter message
field and use the on-
screen keypad to enter a message. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 55.
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.
6. Review your message and tap
Send
.
Note:
If you exit a message before you send it, it will be
automatically saved as a draft.
Message Options
Options before composing a message
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Before composing a message, press to reveal
additional messaging options:
•Search
: allows you to search through all of your messages for
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the
Messaging Search window and tap .
• Settings
: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more
information, refer to
“Messaging Settings”
on page 100.
• Delete threads
: allows you to delete any message thread.
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will
appear next to the message. Tap
Delete
.
Options while composing a message
1. While composing a message, press to reveal
additional messaging options.
• Insert smiley
: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy
face to your message.
•Call
: allows you to call the contact. This option only appears if
you have entered a phone number for the recipient.
Messaging 97
•Add text
: allows you to copy text from your Location, Contacts,
Memo, Task, or Calendar to add to your message. This is a
convenient feature for adding names, phone numbers, events,
etc. to your message.
For more information, refer to
“Adding Additional Text”
on page 98.
• Add to Contacts
: allows you to add the recipient to your
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not
already in your Contacts list.
•View contact
: allows you to see information on the recipient.
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.
• Add slide
: allows you to add a new page to a message.
• Delete message
: allows you to delete the message.
Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap and select
one of the following options:
•
Pictures
: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures
list to add it to your message.
•
Take picture
: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a
photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by
tapping
Save
.
•
Videos
: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos
list,
then add it to your message
.
•
Capture video
: allows you to temporarily exit the message,
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it
to your message by tapping
Save
.
•
Audio
: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping
OK
.
•
Record audio
: allows you to temporarily exit the message and
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then
automatically attached to the message.
•
Location
: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing
your location.
•
Contacts
: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,
then add it to your message by tapping .
•
Calendar
: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event,
then add it to your message by tapping
Add
.
•
Memo
: allows you to tap on an existing Memo, then add it to
your message by tapping
Attach
.
•
Task
: allows you to tap on an existing Task list, then add it to
your message by tapping
Attach
.
98
Adding Additional Text
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press ➔
Add text
.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
•Location
: allows you to add an address and the link to the
location on Google Maps.
•Contacts
: allows you to add the name and phone number of
any of your contacts to your message.
•Memo
: allows you to add an entire memo to your message.
•Task
: allows you to add a task to your message.
•Calendar
: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a
calendar event to your message.
3. Tap the information you want to send. This will place a
checkmark next to the item.
4. Tap
Add
unless you are adding text from Location or
Contacts.
The text is added to your message.
Viewing New Received Messages
1. When you receive a new message, the new message
icon will appear at the top of your screen.
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For
more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page
41.
– or –
From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
then
tap the new message to view it.
The selected message appears in the display.
3. To play a multimedia message, tap .
The video is started in the video player. For more
information, refer to “Video Player” on page 80.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages
have been added), touch the screen and in a single
motion, scroll up or down the page.
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and
Messaging 99
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed
in the order in which they were received, with the latest
message displayed at the top.
To open a threaded message follow these steps:
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
Tap the message thread you want to view.
2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the
following options:
•View contact
: displays the contact’s information. This option
only displays if the sender is in your Contacts list.
• Add to Contacts
: displays the Contacts information screen.
This option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts
list.
• Delete thread
: displays a confirmation dialog box that when
pressed, deletes the entire thread.
Deleting Messages
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap
Delete thread
.
3. At the
Delete
prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to
cancel.
Deleting multiple message threads
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Press ➔
Delete threads
.
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark
will appear beside each message you select.
4. Tap
Delete
.
5. At the
Delete
prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to
cancel.
Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the
Message Search feature.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Tap ➔
Search
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to
search for, then tap .
4. All messages that contain the search string you
entered are displayed.
100
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
➔
➔
Settings
.
2. The following Messaging settings are available:
• Message font size
: allows you to set the size of your message
text to Normal, Small, or Tiny.
•Split view
: allows you to enable split view when you have the
phone in landscape orientation.
• Delete old messages
: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than having them overwritten.
• Text message limit
: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages can be in one conversation.
• Multimedia message limit
: allows you to set a limit on how
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.
• Manage SIM card messages
: allows you to manage the
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.
• Message center
: allows you to enter the number of your
Message center where your messages reside while the system
is attempting to deliver them.
• Input mode
: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose between GSM alphabet, Unicode, or
Automatic.
•Auto-retrieve
: allows the message system to retrieve
messages automatically.
•Creation mode
: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
–
Restricted
: you can only create and submit messages with
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
–
Warning
: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the
Core MM Content Domain.
–
Free
: you may add any content to the message.
• Push messages
: allows you to receive push messages from
the network.
• CB activation
: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)
messages.
• Channel configuration
: allows you to set up the channel that
you will receive CB messages on.
• Language
: allows you to select all of the languages that you
want to receive CB messages in.
Messaging 101
• Notifications
: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
• Select ringtone
: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message notifications.
•Emergency alerts
: allows you to receive wireless emergency
alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS).
For more information, refer to
“Emergency Alerts”
on page
101.
Emergency Alerts
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) which
may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are
provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and
will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within
their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency
Alert message.
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
•
Alerts issued by the President
•
Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life (Extreme and
Severe)
•
AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)
Customers may choose not to receive Imminent Threats
(Extreme and Severe) and AMBER Alerts. Alerts issued by the
President can not be disabled. To disable Imminent Threats
and AMBER Alerts, follow the instructions below:
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Messaging
.
2. Press ➔
Settings
.
3. Scroll to the bottom and tap
Emergency alerts
.
4. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).
Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove
the checkmark.
102
Using Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive text message alerts
when you receive an important email.
Creating an Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap
Email
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the
Email
address
field.
3. Enter your password in the
Password
field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap
Show password
to create a checkmark.
5. Tap
Next
.
6. Enter an account name for this email account
(optional).
7. Tap
Done
.
Creating a Corporate Email Account
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Email
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the
Email
address
field.
3. Enter your password in the
Password
field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap
Show password
to create a checkmark.
5. Scroll down and tap
Manual setup
.
6. Tap the
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
field.
7. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,
Username and Password, then tap
Next
.
8. At the prompt tap
OK
.
The
Account options
screen is displayed.
9. Enter the desired information in the different fields,
then tap
Next
.
Messaging 103
10. If your corporate email system requires that a Device
Administrator is activated, an
Activate device
administrator
screen will display. Tap
Activate
.
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional).
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.
12. Tap
Done
.
13. Press ➔
More
➔
Account Settings
to change the
account settings.
Creating Additional Email Accounts
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first
account, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Email
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Press ➔
Settings
➔ then enter the
information required to set up another account. For
more information, refer to “Creating an Email Account”
on page 102.
Switching Between Email Accounts
1. From the Home screen, tap
Email
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Tap the Inbox button at the top of your screen that
displays the optional name you assigned to your first
email account, for example, Work, Gmail, etc.
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.
3. Tap the Email account you would like to switch to. You
can also select
Combined view
which will display email
messages from all accounts.
4. The new Email account is displayed.
Using Gmail
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
with your Gmail account.
Signing into Your Gmail
Note:
You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to
access Gmail.
104
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Gmail
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
Creating a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap at the bottom of the
screen to create a new message.
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the
To
field.
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a
comma.
3. Tap and select
Add Cc/Bcc
to add a carbon or blind
copy.
4. Enter the subject of this message in the
Subject
field.
5. Tap the
Compose email
field and begin composing your
message.
6. Tap to send.
Viewing a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the
screen:
•Archive
: archives the selected message.
• Delete
: deletes the message.
•Labels
: allows you to attach labels to a message. This is
similar to putting it in a folder.
•Mark Unread
: after reading a message, marks as unread.
•Newer
: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.
•Older
: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.
3. Before selecting a message, press to select one of
the following additional options:
•Label settings
: allows you to set sync and notification settings.
• Settings
: displays Email settings that you can modify.
•Help
: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the
web for help.
• Send feedback
: allows you to send feedback or report a
problem.
4. After selecting a message, press to select one of
the following additional options:
Messaging 105
• Mark important/not important
: allows you to set the
importance of a message.
•Mute
: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable.
•Report spam
: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap
the UNDO option if you change your mind.
•Settings
: displays Email settings that you can modify.
•Help
: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the
web for help.
• Send feedback
: allows you to send feedback or report a
problem.
Other Gmail Options
1. Tap at the bottom of the screen to refresh the
screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize
your email with the Gmail account.
2. Tap at the bottom of the screen to set up and
manage Labels for your Gmail messages.
3. Tap at the bottom of the screen to search through
your Gmail messages.
Google Talk
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your
Gmail accounts.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Talk
.
2. Press
Next
to set up a Google account or to Sign in.
3. Tap
Create
to create a new Google account.
– or –
Tap
Sign in
if you have an existing Google account.
4. After entering your user name and password, press the
Down
Navigation key.
5. Tap
Sign in
.
6. Begin using Google Talk.
Note:
The Network confirms your login and processes. This
could take up to 5 minutes to complete.
106
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Google+
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap
Create a new account
to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit
www.google.com/mobile/+/
for more information.
Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Messenger
.
– or –
From the Google+ application, select
Messenger
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap
Create a new account
to create another account.
4. At the
Messenger
screen, tap to start a new
message.
5. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or
circle.
6. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap
.
7. From the
Messenger
screen, tap
Learn more
for more
detailed information.
Changing Your Settings 107
Section 8: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the settings used for customizing your
device.
Accessing Settings
From any Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
– or –
From any Home screen, press ➔
Settings
.
The Settings screen displays.
Wi-Fi Settings
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on
how to use Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 146
Activating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage
wireless access points.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Tap ➔
Advanced
.
The following options are available:
• Network notification
: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep
: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
• Avoid poor connections
: will not use a Wi-Fi network with
poor internet connections.
•Auto connect
: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
• Notify AT&T network
: automatically notifies you when you are
in the range of an AT&T Wi-Fi network.
• Wi-Fi frequency band
: allows you to specify the frequency
range of operation. Choose from Auto, 5GHz only, or 2.4 GHz
only.
108
•MAC address
: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
•IP address
: view your device’s IP address.
Bluetooth settings
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices
with which to pair.
Activating Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON .
The Bluetooth icon is displayed.
Additional Bluetooth Settings
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Bluetooth
.
2. Tap
Scan for devices
to scan for nearby discoverable
devices. After searching, tap a device to pair with it.
For more information, refer to “Pairing Bluetooth
Devices” on page 151.
3. Tap and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:
• Device name
: Your device’s default name displays on screen.
Tap to change the device name. Available when Bluetooth is
turned On.
• Visible time-out
: Use this setting to control when to
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.
• Show received files
: Show the list of files received by using
Bluetooth.
Data Usage
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Data
usage
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Mobile
data field, to turn Mobile data usage ON .
3. Tap
Set mobile data limit
to create a checkmark and
allow a data limit to be set.
4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you
desire.
Changing Your Settings 109
5. Tap the
Data usage cycle
drop-down menu and select a
date.
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of
how many MB were used per application.
Note:
Data is measured by your device. Your service provider
may account for data usage differently.
6. Press to display additional options. Tap to activate.
• Data roaming
: enables Data roaming on your device.
• Restrict background data
: restricts some apps and services
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.
•Show Wi-Fi usage
: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi
usage.
More... Settings
This tab displays additional wireless and network
information.
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
.
Options display for Airplane mode, USB Utilities, VPN,
Tethering and portable hotspots, Wi-Fi Direct, and
Mobile networks.
Airplane mode
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving
calls or data is prohibited.
Important!
When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online
information or applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
.
2. Tap
Airplane mode
. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Airplane mode is active. The Airplane
mode icon is displayed at the top of your screen.
USB utilities
This option allows you to copy files between your PC and the
memory card in your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
USB utilities
.
110
2. Tap
Connect storage to PC
.
3. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.
4. Tap
Turn on USB storage
.
5. From your PC, open the folder to view your files.
6. Copy files between your PC and the memory card.
7. To exit, tap
Turn off USB storage
.
VPN settings
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
Important!
Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
configure it.
Adding a VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
VPN
.
Note:
You must first set up a Lock screen using either a PIN or
a password. For more information, refer to “Screen
Lock” on page 124.
2. Tap
Add VPN network
.
3. Enter a name for the VPN network in the
Name
field.
4. Select a VPN type from the
Type
drop-down menu. The
options are:
•
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
•
L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol
Security Pre-Shared Key)
•
L2TP/IPSec RSA
•
IPSec Xauth PSK
•
IPSec Xauth RSA
•
IPSec Hybrid RSA
5. Enter the Server address and any other required fields.
6. Tap the
Show advanced options
check box to display
additional VPN options.
7. Tap
Save
to save your VPN settings.
Changing Your Settings 111
Tethering & portable hotspot
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
USB Tethering
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
Tethering and portable hotspots
.
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.
3. Tap
USB tethering
to add a checkmark and activate the
feature. The USB tethering icon is displayed at the
top of your screen.
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
Tethering and portable hotspots
➔
Portable Wi-Fi
hotspot
.
2. Turn Portable Wi-Fi hotspots on by tapping the slider so
that it changes to the ON position .
Note:
If your account has not been updated to enable the Wi-Fi
hotspot feature, go to att.com/mywireless or dial 611 to
have it enabled.
The Portable Wi-Fi hotspot icon is displayed at the
top of your screen.
3. Tap
Configure portable Wi-Fi hotspot
.
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Security setting and
Password.
5. Tap
Next
to move to the next field.
6. Tap
Done
when you are finished.
7. Tap
Hide my device
to create a checkmark if you want
your device hidden.
8. Tap
Save
.
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other
devices
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to
your phone.
2. Find
[GalaxySII_xxxx]
in the Wi-Fi network list and
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi
hotspot on your device.
The connected device can now use internet through
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
112
Note:
Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be
different depending on the type of the other device.
Help
From the
Tethering and portable hotspot
menu, tap
Help
for additional information.
Activating Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
Wi-Fi Direct
.
2. Tap the
OFF / ON
icon to turn Wi-Fi Direct on .
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on page
148.
Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find
your location or search for places of interest, you must
enable the Mobile networks options.
Use Packet Data
To activate the data network, this option must be selected. It
is set on by default.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Use packet data
to create a checkmark and
activate the feature.
Data Roaming
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service
provider’s partner networks and access data services when
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Data roaming
to create a checkmark and activate
the feature.
Access Point Names
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point
(hotspot).
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Access Point Names
.
Changing Your Settings 113
A list of the Access Point names display. The active
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right
of the name.
Network Operators
Using this feature you can view the current network
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Network operators
.
The current network connection displays at the bottom
of the list.
Important!
You must deactivate data service prior to searching
for an available network.
3. Tap
Search networks
to manually search for a network.
4. Tap
Select automatically
to automatically select a
network connection.
Note:
Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer
speed and time.
Default setup options
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically
search for an available network. You can set this option to
Manual to select a network each time you connect.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wireless and network
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Network operators
.
3. Tap
Default setup
.
4. Tap
Manual
to locate and connect to a network
manually, or tap
Automatic
to allow the device to
automatically select a network.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
.
Call rejection
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Call rejection
to enable your phone to reject calls.
2. Tap
Auto reject mode
.
3. Select
Off
,
All numbers
, or
Auto reject numbers
.
4. Tap
Auto reject list
.
5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.
114
6. Tap
Unknown
, to create a checkmark and automatically
reject all unknown calls.
Set reject messages
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Set reject messages
.
2. Tap to manually add a reject message.
– or –
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the
message if desired.
3. Tap
Save
.
Call alert
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Call alert
.
2. Tap
Answer vibration
to enable your phone to vibrate
when the called party answers the phone.
3. Tap
Call status tones
to set the sound settings during a
call then tap
OK
.
4. Tap
Alerts on call
to set the alert type.
Call answering/ending
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Call answering/ending
.
2. The following options are available:
• Answering key
: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming
calls by pressing the Home key.
• Automatic answering
: Tap this option if you are using a
headset and want the call to be automatically answered. Select
the time interval before the call is automatically answered.
• The Power key ends calls
: This option will allow you to end a
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.
Turn on proximity sensor
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Turn on proximity sensor
.
When you answer a call, the screen will be turned off
to save power.
Call forwarding
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Call forwarding
➔
Voice call
.
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Always forward
: allows you to forward all voice calls.
Changing Your Settings 115
• Forward when busy
allows you to forward voice calls to a
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you
are on another phone call.
• Forward when unanswered
: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.
• Forward when unreachable
: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or
when your phone is switched off.
TTY Mode
This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid
Compatibility for this device.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
TTY mode
.
2. Tap
Full TTY
. A green checkmark will appear. Tap
TTY
mode off
to turn it off.
Additional settings
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Additional settings
.
2. Tap one of the following options:
•Caller ID
: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be
displayed. Select Network Default, Hide number, or Show
number.
• Call waiting
: the network service informs you when someone
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.
• Auto redial
: automatically redials the last number if the call
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.
• Fixed dialing numbers
: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to
a limited set of phone numbers.
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers
FDN (Fixed Dialing Number) mode restricts your outgoing
calls to a limited set of phone numbers. When this feature is
enabled, you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in
the FDN list on the SIM card.
116
Enabling FDN
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Additional settings
➔
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
Enable FDN
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap
OK
.
FDN is enabled.
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap
Disable
FDN
, enter your PIN2 code and tap
OK
.
Important!
Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card
does not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.
Changing the PIN2 Code
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Additional settings
➔
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
Change PIN2
.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
Note:
Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be
created.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Additional settings
➔
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
FDN list
.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.
Voicemail Service
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Voicemail service
.
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the
default.
2. Tap
My carrier
to remove the carrier Voicemail service.
Voicemail
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this
menu.
Changing Your Settings 117
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Call
➔
Voicemail
.
2. Tap the
Voice mail number
field, backspace to erase the
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the
keypad, then tap
OK
.
3. Tap
OK
.
Sound Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
The following options display:
Volume
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all
phone sounds in one easy location.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Volume
.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume
for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.
3. Tap
OK
.
Vibration intensity
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the
vibration is for different options.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Vibration intensity
.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration
intensity for Ringtone, Notification, and Vibrate on
screen tap.
Silent mode
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone
from making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode
the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify
you of incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a
defined tone or sound as an alert.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Silent mode
.
3. Tap
Off
,
Vibrate
, or
Mute
.
– or –
1. From the Home screen, press the
Lock
key until
Phone
options
displays.
118
2. Tap
Silent mode
to activate or deactivate this mode (the
current mode displays).
Phone ringtone
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Phone ringtone
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap
OK
.
Default Notifications
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for
notifications and alarms.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Default
Notifications
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap
OK
.
Vibrate and ring
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap
Vibrate and ring
. A green checkmark appears.
System Tone Settings
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the
screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
•Keytones
: makes a sound when you tap a key on the
keyboard.
• Touch sounds
: makes a sound when you touch the screen.
• Screen lock sound
: makes a sound when your screen is
locked or unlocked.
• Vibrate on screen tap
: makes a vibration when you tap the
screen.
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle
lock feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power
saving mode, and tv out settings.
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
The following options display:
Changing Your Settings 119
• Home screen wallpaper
: allows you to set the home screen
wallpaper.
• Lock screen wallpaper
: allows you to set the lock screen
wallpaper.
•Clock
: allows you to display the clock on the lock screen.
• Weather
: allows you to display the weather on the lock screen.
• Weather settings
: allows you to have the temperature
displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius. You can also set the Auto
refresh rate.
• Clock and weather position
: allows you to set the location of
the Clock and Weather to Top, Middle, or Bottom.
•Brightness
: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag
the slider and tap OK.
• Screen mode
: allows you to set the screen mode to Dynamic,
Standard, or Movie.
• Auto-rotate screen
: allows you to switch the display
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.
• Screen timeout
: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30
seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
• Font style
: allows you to set the font style that your phone will
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider
selection.
• Touch key light duration
: allows you to set the time that the
touch keys located on the bottom of your phone are lit.
• Auto adjust screen power
: allows you to save power because
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the
LCD brightness.
• Gyroscope calibration
: allows you to calibrate the gyro
sensors. Place your device on a level surface and tap
Calibrate
.
Power Saving Mode
Power Saving Mode allows you to manage your phone to
conserve power.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Power
saving
.
2. Tap
System power saving
to create a checkmark and
activate the feature. System power saving uses default
settings to help save power on your phone.
– or –
120
Tap
Custom power saving
to create a checkmark and
activate the feature. Custom power saving allows you
to select the items that will be used to save power.
3. If you selected
Custom power saving
, tap
Custom power
saving settings
to access the following options:
• Power saving on at
: allows you to set the battery power level
when Power saving mode will be enabled.
• Turn off Wi-Fi
: automatically turns off Wi-Fi when you are not
connected with Mobile AP.
• Turn off Bluetooth
: automatically turns off Bluetooth when it is
not in use.
• Turn off GPS
: automatically turns off GPS when it is not in use.
• Turn off Sync
: automatically turns off Sync when the phone is
not synchronizing with the server.
•Brightness
: allows you to manually adjust the brightness of the
screen. Tap this option to enable the next Brightness option.
•Brightness
: allows you to set the Brightness percentage of the
screen.
• Screen timeout
: allows you to set the time before the screen
times out and goes into lock mode.
4. Tap
Learn about power saving
to learn about various
ways to conserve battery power.
Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD
card.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD
card, see “Memory Card” on page 42.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Storage.The available memory displays under the
Total
space
and
Available
space headings for both Device
memory, USB storage, and SD card.
Formatting USB storage
Tap
Format USB storage
to erase all data on the phone’s
USB storage such as music and photos.
SD card
1. Tap
Unmount SD card
to unmount your SD card so that
you can safely remove it, then tap
OK
.
Changing Your Settings 121
2. Tap
Format SD card
to re-format your SD card. This will
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,
and photos.
3. Tap
Format SD card
again.
4. Tap
Delete all
to continue or press to cancel.
Battery
See how much battery power is used for device activities.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔ Battery.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery
usage displays in percentages per application.
2. Tap
Screen
,
Cell standby, Android OS
, or any other listed
application to view how it is affecting battery use.
Note:
Other applications may be running that affect battery
use.
Applications
You can download and install applications from Play Store or
create applications using the Android SDK and install them
on your device. Use Applications settings to manage
applications.
Warning!
Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
Memory Usage
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
applications.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Applications
.
2. Tap
Downloaded
,
On SD card
,
Running
, or
All
to display
memory usage for that category of applications.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.
122
Downloaded
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Applications
.
2. Tap the
Downloaded
tab to view a list of all the
downloaded applications on your device.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the
Downloaded tabs, press ➔
Sort by size
or
Sort by
name
.
4. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
Running Services
View and control services running on your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Applications
.
2. Tap the
Running
tab. All the applications that are
currently running on the device display.
3. Tap
Show cached processes
to display all the cached
processes that are running. Tap
Show services in use
to
switch back.
4. Tap one of the applications to view application
information.
The following options display:
•Stop
: Stops the application from running on the device. This is
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.
Warning!
Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services
may have undesirable consequences on the
application or Android System.
•Report
: Report failure and other application information.
Note:
Options vary by application.
Accounts and Sync
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.
Adding an Account
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Accounts
and sync
.
2. Tap
Add account
.
3. Tap one of the account types.
Changing Your Settings 123
4. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
Removing an Account
Important!
Removing an account also deletes all of its
messages, contacts, and other data from the
device.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Accounts
and sync
.
2. Tap an account to display its settings.
3. Tap
Remove account
, then tap
Remove
account
at the
prompt to remove the account and delete all its
messages, contacts, and other data.
Synchronizing Account
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Accounts
and sync
.
2. Tap
Sync all
to synchronize all your accounts. Tap
Cancel sync
to stop the synchronization.
3. On the
Auto-sync
field, tap the
OFF / ON
icon
to turn Auto-sync on or off, which controls whether
changes you make to information on your device or on
the web are automatically synced with each other.
Data and Synchronization
To sync account information manually:
1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔
Accounts
and sync
.
2. Tap on an account.
3. Tap
Sync Now
to synchronize all data for the selected
account.
– or –
Under
Data and synchronization
, tap the account data
to synchronize, such as Books, Calendar, Contacts,
Email, and so on.
Location Services
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings
for your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Location services
.
124
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the service:
• Google location service
: allows applications to use data from
other sources such as mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help
determine your location.
• GPS satellites
: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your
location.
• Use sensor aiding
: this option enhances the positioning
capabilities of your phone and conserves power using sensors.
• Location and Google search
: allows Google to use your
location data for improved search results and other services.
Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security
level for your phone.
Screen Lock
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more
information about using the lock and unlock features, see
“Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen” on page 12
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
for these options:
•None
: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will
never lock.
•Slide
: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
• Face unlock
: The phone recognizes your face and unlocks the
phone. Follow the on-screen instructions to set it up.
•Pattern
: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or
change your screen unlock pattern.
•PIN
: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• Password
: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
Owner Information
This option allows you to show owner information on the lock
screen. You can also enter text to display on the lock screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
➔
Owner information
.
2. Tap the
Show owner info on lock screen
checkbox to
create a checkmark if you want your owner information
displayed.
3. Enter text that you would like displayed on your
lockscreen.
Changing Your Settings 125
4. Press twice to save the new text and return to the
previous screen.
Encryption
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your device
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD
card each time it is connected:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Encrypt device
. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
3. Tap
Encrypt SD card
to enable the encryption on SD
card data that requires a password be entered each
time the microSD card is connected.
Tip:
Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
Encryption may take an hour or more.
Set up SIM card lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also
change your SIM PIN number.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Set up SIM card lock
.
3. Tap
Lock SIM card
, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap
OK
.
Note:
You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change
your SIM PIN code.
4. Tap
Change SIM PIN
.
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
Make passwords visible
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you
touch them while entering passwords.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
126
2. Tap
Make passwords visible
to create a checkmark and
enable or disable the display of password characters.
Device Administrators
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or
more administration applications that control your device for
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device
security policies.
Some of the features a device administration application
might control are:
•
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the
device is restored to factory settings.
•
Automatically locking the device.
•
Restoring factory settings on the device.
Note:
If a device uses multiple enabled administration
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Device administrators
.
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If
no device administrators are listed, you can download
them from Play Store.
Unknown sources
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market
applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Unknown sources
.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Warning!
Enabling this option causes your device and personal
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications
from unknown sources.
Trusted Credentials
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or
remove it.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Trusted credentials
.
Changing Your Settings 127
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:
• System
: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed
in the ROM of your device.
•User
: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.
A scrolling screen displays the details.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap
Disable
to disable a System certificate or
Remove
to
remove a User certificate.
Note:
The
Remove
button is only displayed when a CA
certificate is installed by the User. Otherwise, only the
Disable
button is displayed.
Caution!
When you disable a system CA certificate, the
Disable
button changes to
Enable
, so you can enable the
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.
5. Tap
OK
to return to the certificate list.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Install from device storage
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.
Note:
You must have installed a memory card containing
encrypted certificates to use this feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Install from device storage
, then choose a
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
Clear credentials
Clear stored credentials.
Note:
This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted
certificates.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Tap
Clear credentials
to remove all certificates.
128
Language and Input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard
options.
Language
You can change the language used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Language
.
2. Tap a language from the list.
Keyboards and Input Methods
You can change the keyboard used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap
Default
and select a keyboard.
Select either Android keyboard, Samsung keypad, or
Swype.
3. Tap
Configure input methods
.
4. Tap the icon next to the input method that you
would like to configure the settings for.
5. Based on your selection of input method, the
appropriate settings will appear and are explained
below.
Android Keyboard settings
From this menu you can set Android keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Android keyboard
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Android keyboard
.
3. The following options are available:
• Input languages
: tap on a language that you want to input.
• Auto-capitalization
: check this field to have the keyboard
automatically capitalize the first letter of the first word after a
period, the first word in a text field, and all words in name fields.
• Vibrate on keypress
: check this field to have the phone vibrate
each time you touch a key on the keyboard.
• Sound on keypress
: check this field to play a sound each time
you touch a key on the keyboard.
• Popup on keypress
: check this field to show a small popup of
each character that you type.
• Show settings key
: allows you to select how the settings key
will be displayed.
Changing Your Settings 129
• Voice input key
: check this field to be able to enter text in a
message by talking.
•Auto correction
: allows you to correct mistyped words by
using the spacebar and punctuation.
• Show correction suggestions
: check this field to show
suggested words in a field above the keyboard as you type.
• Advanced settings
: the following advanced settings are
displayed:
–
Key popup dismiss delay
: allows you to set the delay time
that key pop-ups are dismissed. Select No delay or Default.
–
Suggest Contact names
: allows you to use names from your
Contacts for suggestions and corrections.
–
Bigram suggestions
: uses the previous word to help improve
suggestions.
–
Enable recorrections
: allows you to see suggestions when
you make recorrections.
–
Keypress vibration duration settings
: allows you to set the
time that each keypress vibrates. Drag the slider bar to the
desired time.
–
Keypress sound volume settings
: If the keys are set to make
a sound when pressed, this setting allows you to set the volume.
Google voice typing settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keypad options.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Google voice typing
.
3. The following options are available:
• Select input languages
: tap on a language that you want to
input. Select
Automatic
to use the local language or select a
language from the list.
• Block offensive words
:
tap to create a checkmark and enable
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of
your voice-input Google typing.
Samsung Keypad settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keypad options.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Samsung keypad
.
3. Tap the
Portrait keypad types
field and select a text
input method:
•
Qwerty Keypad
•
3x4 Keypad
130
4. Tap the
Input languages
field and tap one of the
languages.
5. To use XT9 Predictive text method, tap
XT9
to create a
checkmark and enable the feature. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text Using the Samsung
Keypad” on page 58.
6. If you are using XT9 Predictive text method, tap
XT9
advanced settings
. For more information, refer to “XT9
Advanced Settings” on page 130.
7. Tap the
Keypad sweeping
field to be able to sweep the
keypad and change from
ABC
to
?123
mode. For more
information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 55.
8. Tap the
Character preview
field to display small pop-up
windows to verify the character you entered.
9. Tap the
Auto-capitalization
field to enable automatic
capitalization.
10. Tap
Voice input
to activate the Voice input feature.
Voice input is an experimental feature using Google’s
networked speech recognition application.
11. Tap
Auto-full stop
to activate the Auto-full stop feature.
When you double space in a message, a period and
space is added and the keyboard is placed into
Uppercase mode so you can start the new sentence
with a capital letter.
12. Tap
Tutorial
for a short tutorial on using the Samsung
keypad.
XT9 Advanced Settings
The following XT9 Advanced settings are only available if the
XT9
field has been selected.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Samsung keypad
.
3.
Tap
XT9 Advanced settings
.
4. Tap the
Word completion
field to enable word
completion. Your phone will predict how to complete
the word you have started.
5. Tap the
Word completion point
field to set how many
letters should be entered before a prediction is made.
Changing Your Settings 131
6. Tap the
Spell correction
field. This option corrects
typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible
words that reflect the characters of the keys you
tapped as well as the characters of nearby keys.
7. Tap the
Next word prediction
field to enable word
prediction for the next word.
8. Tap the
Auto-append
field to automatically add
predictions to the word you are typing.
9. Tap the
Auto-substitution
field to automatically replace
words that you are typing. This option will help for
accidental misspellings.
10. Tap the
Regional correction
field. This option sets the
device to automatically correct mistyped words
according to normal spelling for your region.
11. Tap the
Recapture
field. This option sets the device to
re-display the word suggestion list when you select the
wrong word from the list.
12. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:
Tap the
XT9 my words
field, then press ➔
Add
.
Enter the new word in the
Register to XT9 my words
field, then tap
Done
.
13. To add words to substitute (for example youve
becomes you’ve) tap
XT9 auto-substitution
.
14. A list of substitutions is displayed. If you don’t see the
substitution you want, press ➔
Add
, and then
input the Shortcut word and Substitution word. Tap
Done
.
Swype Settings
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the icon next to
Swype
.
3. Tap one of the following Swype settings:
• Select Input Method
: allows you to switch between different
keyboard types.
•How to Swype
: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.
• Personal dictionary
: Allows you to setup and manage your
own dictionary.
• Preferences
: Allows you to view and modify the following
Swype options:
–
Audio feedback
: When enabled, plays sounds as you enter
text.
132
–
Vibrate on keypress
: check this field to have the phone
vibrate each time you touch a key on the keyboard.
–
Show tips
: When enabled, the device displays helpful tips.
–
Auto-spacing
: When enabled, inserts spaces automatically
when you pause entering text.
–
Auto-capitalization
: When enabled, automatically capitalizes
the first letter of the first word in a sentence.
–
Show complete trace
: When enabled, briefly display the
Swype trace.
–
Word suggestion
: When enabled, suggests possible matching
words as you enter text.
–
Speed vs. accuracy
: Send the sensitivity of Swype text
recognition.
–
Reset Swype’s dictionary
: Deletes all of the words you have
added and loads the default dictionary.
–
Version
: View the current Swype software version.
• Language Options
: Allows you to set the language that you will
be using.
Speech Settings
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice
search.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap
Voice recognition
and select either
Google
or
Samsung powered by Vlingo
as your Voice recognition
engine.
3. Tap
Voice search
to configure:
• Language
: Choose a language for your voice input.
• SafeSearch
: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images
from the results of your voice-input Google searches.
• Block offensive words
: Enable or disable blocking of
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input
Google searches.
Voice output provides audible readout of text, for example,
the contents of email messages.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap
Text-to-speech output
and select the preferred TTS
engine.
Google Text-to-speech
engine
is the default.
Changing Your Settings 133
3. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the
following settings:
• Language
: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech engine
: allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
• Install voice data
: allows you to install voice data for speech
synthesis.
4. From the
Text-to-speech output screen
, scroll down to
the
General
heading to access the following options:
• Speech rate
: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
• Listen to an example
: Play a sample of speech synthesis
(available if voice data is installed).
• Driving mode
: Incoming calls and new notifications are read
aloud when enabled.
• Driving mode settings
: allows you to select items that will be
read out when received or activated.
Mouse/trackpad
This option sets your Pointer speed.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap
Pointer speed
then drag the slide to the right to go
faster or to the left to go slower.
3. Tap
OK
to save your setting.
Backup and Reset
Back Up My Data
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of
your settings and data.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Backup
and reset
.
2. Tap
Back up my data
to enable or disable back up of
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings
to the Google server.
Backup Account
If you have enabled the
Back up my data
option, then the
Backup account
option is available.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Backup
and reset
.
2. Tap
Backup account
and tap your Google Gmail account
or tap
Add account
to set your Google Gmail account to
be backed up to the Google server.
134
Automatic Restore
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of
your backed up settings and data will be restored.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Backup
and reset
.
2. Tap
Automatic restore
to enable or disable automatic
restoration of settings from the Google server.
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings
to the factory default settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Backup
and reset
.
2. Tap
Factory data reset
.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset
information.
3. Tap
Format USB storage
to create a checkmark if you
want to erase all data from USB storage including
music and photos.
4. Tap
Reset phone
, then follow the prompts to perform
the reset.
Warning!
Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data
from your phone and internal SD card, including your
Google account, system and application data and
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not
erase current system software, bundled
applications, and external SD card files such as
music and photos.
Dock Settings
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when
using a car or desk dock.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Dock
.
2. Tap
Audio output mode
to use the external dock
speakers when the phone is docked.
Date and Time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Date
and time
.
2. Tap
Automatic date and time
to allow the network set
the date and time.
Changing Your Settings 135
3. Tap
Automatic time zone
to allow the network set the
time zone.
Important!
Deactivate
Automatic date and time
to manually set
the rest of the options.
4. Tap
Set date
and use the plus or minus icons to set the
Month
,
Day
, and
Year
then tap
Set
.
5. Tap
Set time
and use the plus or minus icons, set
Hour
,
and
Minute
. Tap
PM
or
AM
, then tap
Set
.
6. Tap
Select time zone
, then tap a time zone.
7. Optional: Tap
Use 24-hour format
. If this is not selected
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
8. Tap
Select date format
and tap the date format type.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features to make using the
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.
Note:
You can download accessibility applications from Play
Store and manage their use here.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Tap
TalkBack
to activate the TalkBack feature.
Note:
TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback
to help blind and low-vision users.
Important!
TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,
except passwords, including personal data and
credit card numbers. It may also log your user
interface interactions with the device.
3. Tap
The power key ends calls
option to create a
checkmark if you want to press the power key to end
calls. This will not turn off the screen.
4. Tap
Auto-rotate screen
to automatically rotate the
screen from landscape to portrait when you rotate your
phone.
5. Tap
Tap and hold delay
and then tap a delay time.
Options are: Short, Medium, and Long.
136
6. Tap
Install Web scripts
if want to allow apps to install
scripts from Google that make their Web content more
accessible. Tap
Allow
.
Motion
The Motion settings allow you to set up various Motion
activation services.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Motion
.
2. Tap
Motion activation
to activate the feature. A
checkmark is displayed.
3. The following options are available. Tap the ON/OFF
icon on the top bar to activate each option.
• Tilt to zoom
: allows you to use the Tilt feature to reduce or
enlarge the screen when in Gallery or Browser. Tap Tilt to zoom,
then tap Sensitivity and set the sensitivity using the slider. A
checkmark appears in the Use motion box. Tap Learn about tilt
for more information.
• Pan to edit
: allows you to use the Panning feature to move
icons from one page to another in Home and Application edit
mode. Tap Pan to edit, then tap Sensitivity and set the
sensitivity using the slider. Tap Learn about panning for more
information.
•Double tap
: automatically prepares your phone for voice
commands in Voice talk. Tap to activate. Tap Learn about
double tap for more information.
• Turn over to mute
: allows you to mute incoming calls and
sounds by turning your phone over. Tap to activate. Tap Learn
about turn over for more information.
Developer Options
Use the Developer options to set options for application
development.
USB Debugging
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is
attached to a PC by a USB cable.
Note:
This setting is used for development purposes.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Tap
USB debugging
to enable or disable the setting.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Changing Your Settings 137
Development Device ID
The identification number for your device when using it as a
development tool displays in this field.
Allow Mock Locations
This setting is used by developers when developing
location-based applications.
Note:
This setting is used for development purposes.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Tap
Allow mock locations
to enable or disable the
setting.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Desktop Backup Password
Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Tap
Desktop backup password
.
3. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup
password, the new password for full backups, then
enter the new password again.
4. Tap
Set backup password
to save the password
change.
User Interface Options
Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the
way the screen behaves when using applications or
displaying data.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Tap the check box next to each option to enable:
• Strict mode enabled
: Makes the screen flash when
applications perform long operations on the main thread.
• Show pointer location
: Highlights the data that was touched
on the screen.
• Show touches
: Displays touch interactions on the screen.
• Show screen updates
: Areas of the screen flash when they
update.
• Show CPU usage
: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.
• Force GPU rendering
: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.
• Window animation scale
: Configure the scale for animation
(ranges from off to 10x).
138
• Transition animation scale
: Configure the scale for
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).
Application Options
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Tap
Do not keep activities
to destroy every activity as
soon as the application is closed.
3. Tap
Limit background processes
to set the number of
processes that can run in the background. Options are:
Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4
processes at most.
4. Tap
Show all ANRs
to display a prompt when
applications running in the background are not
responding.
About Phone
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,
and software build number.
To access phone information:
From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
About
phone
.
The following information displays:
• Software update
: allows you to update your phone software, if
available. For more information, refer to
“Software Update”
on page 139.
• Status
: displays the battery status, the level of the battery
(percentage), network, signal strength, mobile network type,
service state, roaming status, mobile network state, the phone
number for this device, IMEI number, IMEI SV, IP address, Wi-Fi
MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, and Up time.
• Legal information
: select one of the following options:
–
Open source licenses
: this option displays information about
Open source licenses.
–
Google legal
: This option displays information about Google
legal information and Google’s Privacy Policy and Terms of
Service.
–
License settings
: This option contains the Register procedure
for DivX
®
VOD.
• Model number
: displays the phone’s model number.
Changing Your Settings 139
• Android version
: displays the android version loaded on this
handset.
• Baseband version
: displays the baseband version loaded on
this handset.
• Kernel version
: displays the kernel version loaded on this
handset.
• Build number
: displays the software, build number.
Note:
Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional
information please contact your AT&T service
representative.
Software Update
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically
updates with the latest available software when you access
this option.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
About
phone
➔
Software update
.
2. Tap
Check for updates
.
3. At the
Software update
prompt, tap
OK
to continue.
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if
available), otherwise, when the
Current software is up
to date
prompt is displayed, tap
OK
.
5. When updating software, once the update file is
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If
you want to resume the update before the selected
time, tap
Continue update
.
140
Section 9: Connections
This section describes the various connections your phone
can make including accessing the Internet with your
Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.
Browser
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to
the basic features.
Accessing the Mobile Web
To access the Browser:
From the Home screen, tap
Web
.
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.
Navigating with the Browser
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with
your finger in an up or down motion.
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across
a web page.
4. To return to the previous page, press .
Zooming in and out of the Browser
There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser.
After tapping on a link or article, use one of these methods:
•
Tilting
: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device
back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first
enable motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer
to
“Motion”
on page 136.
•
Double tap
: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to
zoom in or out.
•
Pinching
: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom
in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).
Browser Options
1. From the home page, press to access the
following options:
•Refresh
: reloads the current page.
•Forward
: forwards the browser to another web page.
• New window
: displays a new window so you can browse
multiple URLs. For more information, refer to
“Adding and
Deleting Windows”
on page 141.
Connections 141
• New incognito window
: displays a new window that is not
tracked on your web history or search history. Pages that you
view incognito are marked with the symbol.
• Add bookmark
: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.
• Share page
: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a
message.
• Find on page
: allows you to search in the current page.
• Desktop view
: Your browser displays a website in a modified
format that makes it easier to read. Desktop view displays a
website the same way it would appear on your PC.
• Save for offline reading
: saves the web page so you can read
it later even when offline.
•Brightness/Color
: allows you to adjust the brightness and
color of your display.
•Page info
: displays information about the selected page.
• Downloads
: displays the download history.
•Print
: allows you to print the screen or web page on a
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.
•Settings
: allows you to modify your web settings. For more
information, refer to
“Browser Settings”
on page 144.
Enter a URL
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these
steps:
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.
The website displays.
Search the Internet
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these
steps:
1. From the Google homepage, tap the
Web
Search
field.
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen
keypad and tap .
3. Tap a link to view the website.
Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.
To add a new window, follow these steps:
1. From your browser, press ➔
New window
.
A new browser window is opened.
142
2. Tap to see thumbnails of all open windows.
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.
4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page
thumbnail to delete the window.
Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.
1. From the Home webpage, tap .
The Bookmarks page is displayed.
2. Press to display the following options:
• Bookmark last-viewed page
: Creates a new bookmark for
the last webpage that you viewed.
• List/Grid view
: You can select
Grid view
(default) to see a
thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or you can
select
List view
to see a list of the bookmarks with Name and
URL listed.
• Create folder
: Creates a new bookmark folder.
• Change order
: Allows you to move pages around on the
Bookmarks page. Touch and hold a bookmark icon, then move
it to the desired location.
• Move to folder
: Allows you to move a page to a folder.
•Delete
: Allows you to delete a bookmark.
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and
hold a bookmark for the following options:
•Open
: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.
• Open in new window
: Opens the webpage in a new window.
•Edit bookmark
: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the
bookmark. For more information, refer to
“Editing
Bookmarks”
on page 143.
• Add shortcut to home screen
: Adds a shortcut to the
bookmarked webpage to your phone’s Home screen.
• Share link
: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google +, Messaging, Social Hub, or
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Copy link URL
: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a
message.
• Delete bookmark
: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more
information, refer to
“Deleting Bookmarks”
on page 143.
Connections 143
• Set as homepage
: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.
Adding Bookmarks
1. From any webpage, tap ➔ ➔
Bookmark
last-viewed page
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the
bookmark, the URL, and the Folder.
3. Tap .
4.
Saved to bookmarks
will appear at the bottom of the
page.
Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to edit.
2. Tap
Edit bookmark
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the
bookmark or the URL.
4. Tap .
Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to delete.
2. Tap
Delete bookmark
.
3. At the
Delete
confirmation window, tap
OK
.
Emptying the Cookies
A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a
website during navigation. In addition to containing some
site-specific information, it can also contain some personal
information (such as a username and password) which can
pose a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear
these cookies from your phone at any time.
1. From the Home webpage, press ➔
Settings
➔
Privacy and security
➔
Clear all cookie data
.
2. At the
Clear
prompt, tap
OK
to delete the cookies or tap
Cancel
to exit.
Using your History
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently
visited websites. These entries can be used to return to
previously unmarked web pages.
1. From the Home webpage, tap ➔
History
.
A list of your most recently visited websites is
displayed with Name and URL address.
2. Tap on a category such as
Today
or
Most visited
.
3. Tap any entry to display the webpage.
144
4. Press ➔
Clear history
to delete the History list.
Saved Pages
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites
that you have saved.
1. From the Home webpage, tap ➔
Saved pages
.
A list of your saved webpages is displayed with Name
and URL address. The webpages that have been visited
the most will appear at the top.
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.
Browser Settings
To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these
steps:
1. Tap
Web
➔ ➔
Settings
.
2. The following options are available:
General
• Set home page
: Sets the current home page for the Web
browser.
•Form auto-fill
: allows you to fill in web forms with a single tap.
• Auto-fill text
: allows you to enter text to be used in the Form
auto-fill feature.
Privacy and security
• Clear cache
: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap
OK
to
complete the process.
• Clear history
: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap
OK
to
complete the process.
• Show security warnings
: Notifies you if there is a security
issue with the current website.
• Accept cookies
: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and
read cookies from your device.
• Clear all cookie data
: Deletes all current browser cookie files.
• Remember form data
: Allows the device to store data from
any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
• Clear form data
: Deletes any stored data from previously filled
out forms. Tap OK to complete the process.
• Enable location
: Allows websites to request access to your
location.
• Clear location access
: Clears location access for all websites.
Tap
OK
to complete the process.
• Remember passwords
: Stores usernames and passwords for
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
Connections 145
•Clear passwords
: Deletes any previously stored usernames or
passwords. Tap
OK
to complete the process.
Accessibility
• Force zoom
: allows you to override the website’s request to
control zoom.
•Text size
: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text size
using a slider bar, and minimize the font size using a slider bar.
• Inverted rendering
: allows you to preview a website page,
select Inverted rendering (black becomes white and vice versa),
and adjust the Contrast using a slider bar.
Advanced
• Select search engine
: allows you to set your default search
engine to Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.
• Open in background
: New pages are launched in a separate
page and displayed behind the current one. Remove the
checkmark to disable this function.
• Enable JavaScript
: Enables Javascript for the current Web
page. Without this feature, some pages may not display
properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
• Enable plug-ins
: Allows the download of plug-ins such as
Adobe Flash.
•Default storage
: Allows you to set your default storage to
Phone or Memory Card.
• Website settings
: View advanced settings for individual
websites.
•Default zoom
: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,
or Close.
• Open pages in overview
: Shows an overview of newly opened
web pages.
• Auto-fit pages
: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much
of the screen as possible.
• Block pop-ups
: Prevents popup advertisement or windows
from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to disable
this function.
• Text encoding
: Adjusts the current text encoding.
• Reset to default
: Clears all browser data and resets all settings
to default.
Bandwidth management
• Preload search results
: Allows the browser to preload high
confidence search results in the background to help speed up
searches.
146
•Load images
: Allows web page images to be loaded along
with the other text components of a loaded website.
Labs
• Quick controls
: allows you to open quick controls and hide the
app and URL bars by swiping your thumb from the left or right
edge of the screen.
•Full screen
: allows you to access Full screen mode and hide
the status bar.
Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
Turning Wi-Fi On
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.
Note:
When you select an open network, you will be
automatically connected to the network.
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.
Connections 147
Manually add your new network connection
1. Tap
Add network
.
2. Enter the
Network SSID
. This is the name of your
Wireless Access Point.
3. Tap the
Security
field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
4. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s
password.
5. Tap
Save
to store the new information and connect to
your target WAP.
Note:
The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset
your device back to its factory default settings.
Turning Wi-Fi Off
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF .
Note:
Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your use times.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Tap
Scan
.
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a
glance:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a
communication issue with the target Wireless
Access Point (WAP).
Displays when connected to another device using
Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi
Direct” on page 148.
148
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set
up many of your device’s Wi-Fi service, including:
•
Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy
•
Viewing your device’s MAC Address
•
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press ➔
Advanced
.
For more information, refer to “Advanced Wi-Fi Settings” on
page 107.
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
Note:
See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi
Direct.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
More...
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
Direct field, to turn Wi-Fi Direct ON .
3. At the
Wi-Fi Direct
prompt, tap
OK
.
4. From the Settings screen, tap
Wi-Fi Direct
.
5. Repeat
steps 1 - 4
on the other device you want to
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,
may be different.
6. On your phone, tap
Scan
.
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.
7. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,
tap on it.
8. The other device has 2 minutes to tap
OK
for the
connection to be made.
9. Once connected, the other device will show as
Connected
in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the
icon will display at the top of your screen.
10. To change your Device name and Password, press
➔
Device name
.
11. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press
➔
Help
.
Connections 149
Sharing Information with Connected Device
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the
connected device, follow these steps:
1. View the information that you want to share. For
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in
your camera viewer or
My Files
folder, then tap the
Share,
Share via,
or
Send via
option.
2. Tap the
Wi-Fi Direct
option.
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,
Android_49ba.
4. The other device will receive a prompt to receive the
information and must tap
OK
.
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been
received. The file can be found in
My Files
in the
ShareViaWifi
folder.
Note:
Depending on the other device model, the prompts and
shared folder information may differ.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
.
Note:
The first time you use the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will
need to download the application from Play Store. For
more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 176.
2. At the
Install
screen, tap
Ok
.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the
updated application from Play Store.
5. Read the License Agreement and tap
Accept
to
continue.
6. At the Welcome screen, tap
OK
.
150
7. At the Initial Setting screen, tap
Yes
if you want AT&T
Smart Wi-Fi to automatically connect to any hotspot
that is available for public use. Otherwise, tap
No
.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.
9. For more information on how to use this application, go
to
www.att.com/smartwifi
.
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is
usually up to approximately 30 feet.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON .
When active, appears within the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF .
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
Bluetooth Settings
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
•
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
•
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other
Bluetooth devices
•
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
Connections 151
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
.
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON .
3. Tap
Bluetooth
.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔
Device
name
.
2. Enter a new name.
3. Tap
OK
to complete the rename process.
To make your device visible:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔
Visible
time-out
.
•
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other
devices for pairing and communication.
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility
to time-out.
Note:
Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds (2 minutes).
This value appears as a countdown within this field.
To show received files:
From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔
Show
received files
.
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
Scan for devices
to search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible
devices such as headsets, devices, printers, and
computers.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the
discovery and authentication process.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. Tap
Scan for devices
. Your device will display a list of
discovered in-range Bluetooth devices.
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
152
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap
OK
.
5. The external device will then have to also accept the
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.
Note:
Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth
compatible devices.
Note:
Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.
Disconnecting a paired device
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your phone, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the
connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap
OK
to confirm disconnection.
– or –
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device, and select
Disconnect
.
Note:
Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your phone or it is powered off.
Connections 153
Deleting a paired device (unpair)
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you
re-enter all the previous pairing information.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device (from the bottom
of the page). This opens the connected device’s menu
options.
3. Tap
Unpair
to delete the paired device.
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or
other items using a Bluetooth connection.
Note:
Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Contacts
.
3. Press ➔
Import/Export
➔
Send namecard via
.
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each
entry you select.
5. Tap .
6. Tap
Bluetooth
.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.
Note:
The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your
notifications list.
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC
data cable using various USB connection modes. When you
connect the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with
Windows Media Player, transfer data to and from your device
directly, or use the Kies air application to access your PC
wirelessly.
154
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.
Note:
The file directory of the memory card displays as a
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files
from or to the memory card to your PC.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
More...
➔
USB utilities
.
3. On your phone, tap
Connect storage to PC
.
4. Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC
using a PC data cable.
5. A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.
6. On your phone, tap
Turn on USB storage
.
7. Tap
OK
.
Your phone will appear on your PC as a removable disk.
8. On the PC pop-up, click
Open folder to view files
.
9. Copy files between your PC and your memory card.
Kies air
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi
network. You can view and share call logs, videos, photos,
music, bookmarks, ringtones, and even send SMS messages
from your PC.
To use the Kies air, follow these steps:
1. Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and
from your PC.
2. On your phone, from the Home screen, tap ➔
Kies
air
.
3. From the Kies air homescreen, tap
Start
.
A web URL is displayed on your phone screen.
4. From your PC, enter the URL in your web browser.
5. On your phone, an Access Request prompt is
displayed. Tap
Allow
to continue.
6. Tap the
Remember for today
checkbox if you will be
using Kies air with the same PC later.
7. From your PC, a security warning may be displayed
asking if you want to run this application. Click
Run
to
continue.
Connections 155
8. On your PC, the Kies air screen is displayed. On your
phone, the icon appears at the top of your screen.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share
information between your phone and PC.
10. To exit the Kies air application, tap
Stop
on your phone,
then close out the web browser on your PC.
NFC
Near Field Communication (NFC) may be available on this
phone in the future, but is now temporarily disabled.
156
Section 10: Applications
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to
navigate through that particular application. If the application
is already described in another section of this user manual,
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.
Tip:
To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,
see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 35
You can also add an application icon as a Primary
Shortcut that will display on all Home screens. If you add
an application as a primary shortcut, the application icon
will not be displayed in the Applications menu. For more
information, refer to “Adding and Removing Primary
Shortcuts” on page 36.
AllShare
AllShare allows your phone to stream photos, music and
videos from its memory to other Digital Living Network
Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Your phone can also play
digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices.
Note:
To view more information about DLNA certified products
visit
http://www.dlna.org/home
.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer
to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on page 146.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AllShare
.
The AllShare screen is displayed.
3. To share media, tap
Videos
,
Photos
, or
Music
and tap
on the media that you would like to share.
4. At the
Select device
screen, any devices that you can
share with are displayed.
5. Tap on a device to share media.
6. Tap the
Remote device
tab at the top of the screen.
All devices that you can receive media from are
displayed.
7. Tap a device name.
Media that you can receive from the other device is
listed.
Applications 157
8. Tap an item that you want to stream to your phone.
9. Press ➔
Settings
to configure the following
settings:
•Device name
: defaults to your phone. Use the keypad to enter
a new Media server if desired, and tap
Save
.
• Share videos/photos/music
: allows you to restrict what is
shared from your phone. Tap the items you want to share.
• Upload from other devices
: allows you set the phone to select
how uploads from other devices are started. Tap
Always
accept
,
Always ask
, or
Always reject
.
•Default memory
: allows you to have media saved to your
Phone
or
Memory Card
. Tap an option.
•Subtitles
: allows you to see subtitles on shared media.
Depending on the setting you changed, a pop-up
screen may display to restart AllShare. Tap
Yes
to
continue.
Amazon Kindle
This application allows you to download books, magazines,
and newspapers to read on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Amazon Kindle
.
2. At the Kindle display, tap
Get Kindle for Android
.
3. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the
application from Play Store.
AT&T Code Scanner
AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR
and datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN)
barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T Code Scanner
.
Note:
The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will
need to download the updated application from Play
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap
Update
.
For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page
176.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap
Accept
to
continue.
158
4. At the My Profile screen, tap
OK
to allow your location
information to be used or tap
Don’t Allow
to bypass.
5. Enter your information in the My Profile section.
6. Tap
ON
to activate your profile. This allows the
application to customize your results. For example,
your zip code may help to deliver a coupon for a
restaurant in your neighborhood. You can toggle the
activation button between ON and OFF.
7. Tap
Done
.
8. Read the tutorial and tap
Next
until you are at the end
of the tutorial. Tap
Finish
.
9. Position your phone approximately 2-5 inches from the
barcode. Ensure that the barcode is completely within
the window. Keep your phone steady for best results.
10. The scanner will automatically scan the barcode. It
may take several seconds.
11. After the scan, tap
Yes
to open the web page to view
the information on the barcode that was scanned.
AT&T FamilyMap
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless
phone or PC and know that your family's location information
is secure and private.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T FamilyMap
.
Note:
The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to
download the application from Play Store. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 176.
2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, enter your
Phone Number and Password in the appropriate fields
and tap
Submit
.
Note:
To sign up for service, visit
http://www.att.com/familymap
for more information.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Applications 159
AT&T Navigator
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-
driven applications. These programs not only allow you to
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local
searches.
Important!
You must have a data plan to use this feature.
Note:
These services require the purchase of a subscription.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
AT&T Navigator
.
2. Read the
Terms of Service
and tap
Accept
to
acknowledge the terms of use.
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T
Navigator main screen displays.
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to
purchase.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use. For more information,
refer to “AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 149.
Calculator
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also
keeps a history of recent calculations.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Calculator
.
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric
keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.
4. Enter the second number.
5. To view the result, tap equals (
=
).
6. To view calculator history, tap located at the
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past
calculations is displayed. Tap again to display
the calculator keypad.
160
7. To clear the calculator history, press ➔
Clear
history
.
8. To change the text size, press ➔
Text size
. Tap
Small, Medium, or Large.
Calendar
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act
as a reminder, if necessary.
To access the Calendar:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Calendar
.
2. The following options are available:
•Month
: the calendar displays the selected month with today’s
date highlighted. At the bottom of the calendar, scheduled
events display in the order that they occur.
• Week
: the calendar displays the selected week with today’s
time and date highlighted.
•Day
: the calendar displays the selected day with any events
highlighted.
•List
: the Event List displays all events that you have added for
all dates in the order that they appear.
Calendar Options
From any Calendar view, press to display the
following options:
• Create event
: allows you to create a new event for any day or
time period.
•Go to
: allows you to go to any date on your calendar.
•Today
: takes you to today’s date, if you are not already there.
•Search
: allows you to search through your calendar for a
particular word or words.
Calendar View Event List
Current Day
Days with
Events for
Events
Previous Month Next Month
Selected Day
Applications 161
•Delete
: displays the event list, where you can select events to
delete.
•Settings
: displays the following calendar settings:
–
Calendars
: displays all calendars they you have created.
–
Default view
: allows you to set the default view to Month,
Week, Day, or List.
–
Day view
: allows you to set the Day view to display with times
listed or as a list of events. Select Time grid or Event List.
–
First day of week
: allows you to set the first day of the week to
Sunday or Monday. This will affect how the Month view calendar
is displayed.
–
Hide declined events
: will not display events you have
received from others if you have declined them.
–
Hide birthdays from Contacts
: will not display the birthdays
of your contacts.
–
Lock time zone
: allows you to lock the event times and dates
to the time zone that you select.
–
Select time zone
: allows you to set the time zone to which
event times and dates will be locked.
–
Set alerts & notifications
: allows you to turn on audio alerts,
set Status bar notification, or turn alerts off.
–
Vibration
: allows you to set the Event notification tone to vibrate
Always, Only in Silent mode or Never.
–
Select ringtone
: allows you to set the ringtone for the Event
notification tone.
–
Calendar sync
: allows you to sync your calendar with other
accounts such as email or social accounts.
Event List
The Event List displays all events that you have added for all
dates in the order that they appear.
1. From the Calendar, tap the
List
icon.
2. Tap any event to display it.
3. Press to display the following options:
•Edit
: allows you the change the Event name, date, time,
location, participants, alarm, alarm details, and description. Tap
Save
.
• Delete
: allows you to delete any event. Tap
OK
at the prompt.
• Send via
: allows you to send event information via Bluetooth,
Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
162
Camera
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera to produce photos in a JPEG
format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take videos.
For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 82.
Clock
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.
Alarm
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific
time.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Alarm
➔
Create alarm
. The following options display:
•Time
: tap the (
+
)
or (
-
)
to set the new time for the event, at
which time an alarm will sound.
•Alarm repeat
: use this option to set the repeating status for the
alarm by tapping one of the following options:
–
Weekly
:
sets the alarm to sound once every week on the
day and time that is set.
–
Daily
:
sets the alarm to sound all seven days of the week.
–
Every weekday (Mon-Fri)
:
sets the alarm to sound on all
five weekdays.
–
One-time event
:
sets the alarm to sound only once.
•Alarm type
: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and
Briefing).
• Alarm volume
: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.
•Alarm tone
: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm
is activated. Select
Sounds
or
Go to My files
.
•Snooze
: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times).
•Smart alarm
: tracks body movements and calculates the best
time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone somewhere on
your bed then the phone's movement sensor (also known as
accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work from any part of the
bed. Set the Duration and the Tone.
•Name
: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.
2. Tap
Save
to store the alarm details.
Turning Off an Alarm
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the
icon to the right.
Applications 163
Setting the Snooze Feature
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
touch and sweep the icon to the left. Snooze must
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,
refer to “Alarm” on page 162.
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Alarm
➔
➔
Delete
.
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green
checkmark will appear next to each selection.
3. Tap
Delete
.
World Clock
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around
the world.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
World
clock
. The clock for your time zone is displayed.
2. Tap
Add city
to add another city to the World Clock.
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to
enter a city to search for.
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will
display.
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,
then tap
DST settings
.
6. Select
Automatic
,
Off
,
1 hour
, or
2 hours
.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, the sun symbol on
the World Clock listing will appear orange.
Deleting a World Clock Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
World
clock
➔
➔
Delete
.
2. Tap the city clocks you wish to delete.
3. Tap
Delete
.
Stopwatch
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Stopwatch
.
2. Tap
Start
to start the stopwatch and tap
Lap
to mark a
unit of time per lap.
Z
Z
164
3. Tap
Stop
to stop the stopwatch.
4. Tap
Restart
to continue or tap
Reset
to erase all times
recorded.
Timer
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer
to count down to an event based on a preset time length
(hours, minutes, and seconds).
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Clock
➔
Timer
.
2. The
min
field is highlighted and set to 1 minute. Use
the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.
3. Tap the
hr
field to set hours if desired. As you tap
different fields, they will become highlighted.
4. Tap the
sec
field to set seconds.
5. Tap
Start
to begin the timer and tap
Stop
to pause the
timer.
6. After stopping, tap
Restart
to continue or tap
Reset
to
set the timer back to the original setting.
Contacts
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can
be sorted by name, entry, or group.
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with
AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.
For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address
Book” on page 61.
Downloads
The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your
downloads from Play Store and the Browser.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Downloads
.
All of your downloads are listed.
2. Tap the
Internet downloads
tab to see all of the
downloads you have made from the Browser.
3. Tap the
Other downloads
tab to see all other
downloads.
4. Tap
Sort by size
to see your downloads sorted in size
order.
5. Tap
Sort by date
to see your downloads sorted in date
order.
Applications 165
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive text message alerts
when you receive an important email. For more information,
refer to “Using Email” on page 102.
Facebook
You can use the Facebook app to go directly to your
Facebook account rather than accessing it from the Browser.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Facebook
.
2. If you already have a facebook account, tap on the
Email
and
Password
fields and enter your information
using the on-screen keyboard, then tap
Login
.
– or –
If you don’t have a Facebook account, tap
Sign up
and
follow the on-screen instructions.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to
“Gallery” on page 81.
Gmail
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more
information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 103.
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer
to “Google +” on page 106.
Kies air
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi
network. You can view call logs, videos, photos, bookmarks,
IMs, and even send SMS messages from your home
computer. For more information, refer to “Kies air” on page
154.
166
Latitude
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your
location.
You must first set up your phone to use wireless networks to
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when
Wi-Fi is enabled.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Latitude
.
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 30
meters.
Sharing your Location with Friends
1. From the Latitude map screen, tap
FRIENDS LIST
to
display your Latitude friends. At first, only your name is
displayed.
2. Tap .
3. Tap
Select from Contacts
or
Add via email address
.
4. Tap a contact or enter an email address and tap
Add
friends
.
5. At the
Send sharing requests
prompt, tap
Yes
.
Your friend will receive an email or text message with
your location marked on a map. They will also receive
instructions on how to view your location from the web
or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is
available. Once they acknowledge your request, their
location will display on your phone. They can share
their location from their computer, phone, or tablet. For
more information, go to
http://www.google.com/latitude
.
6. To view the map, tap
MAP VIEW
.
Latitude Options
From the map display, press to display the
following options:
•Clear Map
: allows you to remove all markings and layers from
the map.
•Search
: allows you to search for a place of interest.
•Directions
: displays navigation directions to a location from a
starting point.
•Layers
: Layers are additional items that you can have
displayed on your map. They include Traffic, Satellite, Terrain,
Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia.
+
Applications 167
•Settings
: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you
can receive help on Google Maps.
–
Cache Settings
: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map
tiles when not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the
map tiles.
–
Location settings
: allows you to manage the settings for your
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude
location sharing, and Check-ins.
–
Labs
: this is a testing ground for experimental features that
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.
–
Terms, Privacy & Notices
: displays the Terms and Conditions,
Privacy Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired
information from the pop-up menu.
–
Feedback
: allows you to send feedback to Google.
–
About
: displays general information about Google maps such
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,
Free memory, etc.
•Help
: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you
can receive help on Google Maps.
Live TV
Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch
your favorite TV shows using your handset. For more
information, refer to “Live TV” on page 78.
Maps
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and
satellite maps and local business information, including
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You
can also post public messages about a location and track
your friends.
Important!
Before using Google Maps you must have an active
data (3G) connection. The Maps application does
not cover every country or city.
Enabling a Location Source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To
enable the location source you must enable the wireless
network, or enable the GPS satellites.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Location services
.
168
2. Tap the
GPS satellites
field. A green checkmark will
display next to the field.
Note:
Selecting
GPS satellites
allows you to locate places of
interest at the street-level. However, this also requires a
clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
•
inside a building or between buildings
•
in a tunnel or underground passage
•
in poor weather
•
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
•
in a vehicle with tinted windows
Using Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Maps
.
A map will display with your location in the very center.
2. Icons for the following options are displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
3. Press to display the following options:
•Clear Map
: allows you to remove all markings and layers from
the map.
• Settings
: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you
can receive help on Google Maps.
–
Cache settings
: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map
tiles when not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the
map tiles.
Search
: allows you to search for a place of
interest.
Directions
: displays navigation directions to a
location from a starting point.
Places
: find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions,
and other businesses.
Layers
: additional items that you can have
displayed on your map. They include Traffic,
Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My
Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia.
Applications 169
–
Location settings
: allows you to manage the settings for your
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude
location sharing, and Check-ins.
–
Labs
: this is a testing ground for experimental features that
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.
–
Terms, Privacy & Notices
: displays the Terms and Conditions,
Privacy Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired
information from the pop-up menu.
–
Feedback
: allows you to send feedback to Google.
–
About
: displays general information about Google maps such
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,
Free memory, etc.
•Help
: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you
can receive help on Google Maps.
Media Hub
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie
and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For
more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 73.
Memo
This feature allows you to create a memo and send it via
Bluetooth, Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Memo
.
2. To create a new memo, tap
Create memo
.
– or –
Press
➔
Create
.
3. Type your Memo using the keypad and tap
Save
.
The memo will display in the memo list.
4. To send a Memo, touch and hold the Memo in the
Memo list.
5. Tap
Send
.
6. Tap
Bluetooth
,
Email
,
Messaging
, or
Wi-Fi Direct
.
7. Enter the recipient information and tap
Send
. For more
information, refer to “Message Options” on page 96.
8. To modify a Memo, tap the pencil icon in the top right
corner of the Memo. Edit the Memo then tap
Save
.
9. From the Memo list, press
to display the following
options:
•Create
: allows you to create a new memo.
170
•Delete
: allows you to delete one or all of your memos.
•Search
: allows you to search your memos for a particular word
or words.
•Send
: allows you to send one or several of your memos at one
time. You can send via Bluetooth, Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi.
•Sort by
: allows you to sort by Date or Color.
• SNS log-in
: allows you to log into your Facebook, Twitter,
Myspace, or LinkedIn accounts.
•Sync memo
: allows you to sync your memos Google Docs or
send individual memos.
•PIN lock
: allows you to set a PIN lock so that a PIN must be
entered before reading a memo.
Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone. For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page
106.
Mini Diary
The Mini Diary allows you to keep a diary of your daily
activities and also attach pictures. You can publish your diary
entries to Facebook and MySpace.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Mini Diary
.
2. Tap
Create diary
to start a new diary entry.
3. Tap the
Tap to add photo
field to add a photo.
4. To take a new picture, tap
Camera
. To add a photo from
your Gallery, tap
Gallery
.
5. Tap the
Tap to add text
field to add text to your diary
then tap
Done
.
6. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a memo then tap
Done
.
7. Tap the
Add location
field to add your location then tap
Done
.
8. Tap
Save
.
9. The diary entry will be added to your Mini Diary with
today’s date.
10. While in a diary entry that has been previously saved,
press
to display the following options:
•Create
: allows you to create a new diary entry.
Applications 171
•Delete
: allows you to delete a diary entry.
•Go to
: allows you to go to a selected date on the Calendar.
• Change photo
: allows you to change your photo if you have
already added one. This option only displays if a photo has
been added.
• Delete photo
: allows you to delete your photo. This option only
displays if a photo has been added.
•Publish
: allows you to publish your diary to Facebook.
• Send via
: allows you to send your Diary entry by Email or
Messaging.
11. At the Mini Diary screen, press
to display the
following options:
•Search
: allows you to search your diaries for a particular word
or words.
•List by
: allows you to sort by Date or Location.
• Delete all
: allows you to delete all diary entries.
•Settings
: allows you to select
Auto update
which will update
your Selected city based on GPS.
Movies
The Movies application allows you to rent movies to watch
on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Settings
➔
Security
➔
Unknown sources
.
You are now allowed to download non-Market
applications.
2. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Movies
.
3. Read the Terms of Service, then tap the
I accept the
mSpot Terms of Service
checkbox.
4. Enter your birth date, and tap
OK
.
5. At the Movies download screen, select the desired
movie and tap
Rent
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to rent the movie.
Music Player
Music Player allows you to play music files that you have
stored on your phone and memory card. You can also create
playlists. For more information, refer to “Music Player” on
page 75.
172
My Files
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in
one convenient location.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
My Files
.
2. The following folders display:
•DCIM
: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken
by the device. Tap
DCIM
➔
Camera
to view the picture or
video files. For more information, refer to
“Accessing
Pictures”
on page 87. Also, see
“Accessing Videos”
on
page 91
•Android
: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android
applications.
•external_sd
: this folder displays all of the files that you have on
your memory card.
• bluetooth
: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.
Note:
Different folders may appear depending on how your
phone is configured.
myAT&T
MyAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T account. You
can review and pay your bill, check minutes and data usage,
upgrade to a new device, or change your rate plan.
Note:
The first time you use myAT&T, you will need to
download the updated application from Play Store.
When the Play Store page displays, tap
Update
or
Install
then follow the on-screen instructions. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 176.
Initial Setup
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
myAT&T
.
2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an
account, see “Creating a New Google Account” on
page 13
3. After signing into your Google Account, Play Store
displays the
myAT&T
application.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to update the app.
Using myAT&T
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
myAT&T
.
The
myAT&T
page is displayed.
Applications 173
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap
Accept
to
continue.
3. Enter your
User ID
and
Password
using the on-screen
keypad, then tap
Login
.
Note:
For
User ID
, you can use your wireless phone number, U-
verse Member ID, Home Phone & DSL username, or your
AT&T Access ID.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Navigation
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system
with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.
Note:
For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-
speech support from Play Store.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
•
inside a building or between buildings
•
in a tunnel or underground passage
•
in poor weather
•
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
•
in a vehicle with tinted windows
Launching Navigation
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Navigation
.
2. Read the Navigation information page and tap
Accept
to continue or
Don’t accept
to exit.
3. Select one of the following options:
• Speak destination
: allows you to speak your destination.
• Type destination
: allows you to use the keypad to enter your
destination.
•Contacts
: displays a list of all of your contacts that have
addresses listed.
•Starred places
: allows you to keep a list of favorite
destinations, locations, restaurants, etc. Just tap a starred item
to get directions.
• Recent destinations
: allows you to access information on
previous destinations you have used. This option only appears
after you have entered one or more destinations.
Navigation Options
The map displays with your location in the center.
Press for the following options:
174
• Exit navigation
: exits the Navigation application and returns
you to the Application Menu screen.
• Route info
: displays your route on a map.
•Set destination
: displays the Choose Destination screen where
you can speak or type your destination.
•Search
: allows you to speak or type a destination, place, or
service to search for.
•Layers
: are additional items that you can have displayed on
your map. They include:
–
Traffic view
: displays real-time traffic conditions so you can
plan the fastest route.
–
Satellite
: allows you to see you the map as a satellite image.
–
Parking
: allows you to see registered parking areas.
–
Gas stations
: allows you to see registered gas stations.
–
ATMs & banks
: allows you to see registered ATMs and Banks.
–
Restaurants
: allows you to see registered restaurants.
• Directions list
: displays the written directions on how to arrive
at your destination.
•Help
: takes you to the Google Mobile Help web page.
• Settings
: includes the following options:
–
Screen dimming
: set this option to dim the screen between
instructions in order to conserve battery power.
–
Terms, privacy & notices
: displays Terms and Conditions for
Google mobile products, the Google Privacy Policy, and Google
legal notices.
Obtaining Driving Directions
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-
time driving directions to selected locations or
establishments based on your current location.
Using a Physical Address
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Navigation
.
2. Tap either
Speak Destination
or
Type Destination
.
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and
State using the keypad. As you type, possible
addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see
the address you want.
The route will be displayed.
4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is
displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to
install text-to-speech support from Play Store. Tap
Install
to install the application or tap
Skip
to exit.
Applications 175
Note:
You will need to be signed on to your Google account
before downloading applications from Play Store. For
more information, refer to “Creating a New Google
Account” on page 13.
5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you
will receive voice-guided navigation directions.
News & Weather
The News & Weather application allows you to view the news
and weather in your area.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
News & Weather
.
The Weather screen is displayed with current
temperature, conditions, Humidity, and Wind speed.
2. Tap the temperature to display a graph mapping the
days temperature and humidity.
3. While on the Weather screen, press
to display the
following options:
•Refresh
: allows you to refresh the screen. Your location and the
weather is updated if there have been any changes.
•Settings
: allows you to set weather, news, and refresh settings.
–
Weather settings
: allows you to choose location(s) and set the
metric for temperature displays.
–
News settings
: allows you to choose topics, configure settings
for fetching articles and images, and view the terms of service
for news service.
–
Refresh settings
: allows you to choose options for updating
content.
–
Application version
: displays the application version number.
4. To view the news, sweep the screen to the left to
display
TOP STORIES
,
U.S.
,
SPORTS
, and
ENTERTAINMENT
.
Photo Editor
The Photo Editor application provides basic editing functions
for pictures that you take on your phone. Along with basic
image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also
provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture.
For more information, refer to “Photo Editor” on page 93.
Places
Places is an application that uses Google Maps and your
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own
locations.
Now is the time for all good
men to come to the aid of their
country. The quick brown fox
jumps over the lazy dog.
176
The Places application allows you to find the best sources for
business information across the web, including business
listing details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and
other related information. Business owners can provide
additional details, like photos, hours of operation, and
coupons.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Places
.
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a
particular business.
All of the business categories that are close to you will
be displayed.
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.
4. The business details such as address, phone, website,
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews
from around the web and from Google users.
Play Books
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the
eBookstore.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Play Books
.
2. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play
Books application.
Play Movies
With Google Play Movies, you can rent thousands of different
movies. You can watch instantly, or download your movie for
offline viewing at a later time. For more information, refer to
“Play Movies” on page 81.
Play Music
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC. For more information, refer to “Google
Play Music” on page 78.
Play Store
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.
For more information, refer to “Creating a New Google
Account” on page 13.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
Play Store
.
Applications 177
2. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 13.
3. The first time you sign in, Play Store Terms of Service
will be displayed. Tap
Accept
to continue or
Decline
to
exit.
4. Tap
Apps
,
Games
, or
AT&T
to download or purchase
games or applications. You can also download updates
to existing applications.
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.
Note:
To use any downloaded Play Store application that
requires a USB connection between your phone and your
PC, you should first set the USB utilities setting to
Connect storage to PC
. For more information, refer to
“USB utilities” on page 109.
Qik Lite
Qik Lite allows you to record and share live video from your
device with your friends, family and your favorite social
networks. For more information, refer to “Qik Lite” on page
79.
Quickoffice
The Quickoffice application allows you to create and save
Microsoft Word and Excel documents. You can also view
existing Powerpoint presentations and PDFs.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Quickoffice
.
2. The first time you use the Quickoffice application, read
the License information and tap
I Accept
to continue.
3. Tap the
E-mail Address
field, then use the keypad to
enter your E-mail address.
4. Tap
Register Now
.
– or –
Tap
Register Later
.
The Quickoffice screen is displayed.
5. The following Quickoffice applications are available:
•Quickword
: allows you to create and save Word documents on
your phone. you can also access Word documents from your
SD card and your Recent Documents folder.
• Quicksheet
: allows you to create and save Excel spreadsheet
documents.
•Quickpoint
: allows you to view existing Powerpoint documents
from your SD card and your Recent Documents folder.
178
•QuickPDF
: allows you to view existing PDF documents from
your SD card and your Recent Documents folder.
6. Select an option and follow the on-screen instructions.
Search
The Search application is the same on-screen Internet
search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on your main
Home screen. For more information, refer to “Google Search
Bar” on page 31.
Settings
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 107.
Social Hub
With Social Hub, you can now easily and intuitively satisfy all
of your relevant communication needs from one integrated
user experience. E-mails, instant messaging, social network
contents, and calendar contents from all major service
providers are available.
To access Social Hub:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Social Hub
.
The Social Hub Welcome page describes all of the
available features.
2. To setup your Social Hub account, tap
Set up now
.
3. Tap on the Social Hub account type that you would like
to setup.
4. Read the SNS disclaimer, tap the
I accept all the terms
above
checkbox, then tap
Agree
to continue.
5. Tap
Next
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions for adding an
account.
7. From the Social Hub main screen, tap the
Feeds
or
Messages
tabs to see information pertaining to your
account.
8. To add another account, press
➔
Accounts
then
tap
Add account
.
9. To refresh your status, press
➔
Refresh
.
Applications 179
Talk
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your
Gmail accounts. For more information, refer to “Google Talk”
on page 105.
Task
With the Task application you can create a task list of things
you need to do and add
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Task
.
2. Tap
Create task
to start a new task entry.
3. Tap the
Name
field and enter a task name using the
keypad.
4. Tap the
Due date
field and enter a due date name using
the keypad. If there is no date that the task is due, tap
the
No due date
checkbox.
5. If desired, enter
Task
,
Priority
,
Reminder
, and
Notes
then tap
Save
.
6. At the Task list screen, press
to display the
following options:
•Create task
: allows you to create a new task.
• Delete
: allows you to delete one or all of your tasks.
•Search
: allows you to search your tasks for a particular word or
words.
•List by
: allows you to sort by Due date, Status, or Priority.
• Sync task
: allows you to sync your tasks to any of your
accounts.
7. From the Task list screen, tap a task once you have
completed it and a checkmark appears next to the
task. The task name is also grayed out so that you can
still read it.
Task Manager
The Task Manager application provides information about the
processes and programs running on your phone, as well as
the memory status. It can also be used to terminate
processes and applications.
To access the Task Manager, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Task manager
.
2. The Task Manager options are located at the top of the
screen. The following options are available:
180
• Active applications
: displays all of the applications that are
presently running on your phone. Tap Exit to end an application,
or tap Exit all to end all running applications.
•Downloaded
: displays the size of your downloaded application
programs.
•RAM
: displays the Random Access Memory (RAM) and allows
you to clear different levels of RAM.
•Storage
: displays a summary of the phone’s storage.
•Help
: displays information on how to extend battery life.
Video Maker
Video Maker allows you to custom-make your own videos.
You can add themes, music, pictures, and other videos to you
video. For more information, refer to “Video Maker” on page
81.
Video Player
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your
memory card. For more information, refer to “Video Player”
on page 80.
Voice Command
With the Voice Command application you can use your voice
to perform operations that you would normally have to do by
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,
playing music, etc.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Voice command
.
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap
Confirm
to
continue.
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap
Agree
to
continue.
4. Read the information on the
How to Use Samsung voice
screen, then tap
Confirm
.
5. Read the information on the
Help
screen and tap
Finish
.
6. At the Voice talk screen, tap on an icon for assistance
in using Voice command or tap
Tap & Speak
to speak
what you would like to do.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
8. For more information, press ➔
Help
.
Applications 181
Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to
one minute long and then immediately share it using
AllShare, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time
will vary based on the available memory within the phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Voice Recorder
.
2. To start recording, tap and speak into the
microphone.
3. During the recording process you can either tap
Stop
to stop and save the recording or
Pause
to temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap
to resume recording. Once the audio
recording has stopped, the message is automatically
saved. Tap to cancel the recording without
saving.
4. Tap to display a list of all your voice
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.
5. Press
to display the following options:
•Share
: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth,
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete
: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap
the recordings to delete and tap
Done
.
•Rename
: allows you to rename your recordings.
•Settings
: the following settings are available:
–
Storage
: allows you to choose where your recordings will be
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.
–
Default name
: allows you to choose the name prefix for your
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,
etc.
–
Recording quality
: allows you to set the recording quality to
High or Normal.
–
Limit for MMS
: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for
MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can
be sent in a message.
Voice Talk
With the Voice Talk application you can use your voice to
perform operations that you would normally have to do by
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,
playing music, etc.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Voice talk
.
Record
Stop
Pause
Record
Cancel
List
182
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap
Confirm
to
continue.
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap
Agree
to
continue.
4. Read the information on the
How to use Samsung voice
screen, then tap
Next
.
5. Read the information on the
Wake up Voice talk
screen,
then tap
Next
.
6. Read the information on the
What can I say?
screen,
then tap
Done
.
7. At the Voice talk screen, tap on an icon for assistance
in using Voice command or tap
Tap & Speak
to speak
what you would like to do.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Words Free
You can play Words Free with Friends, everyone’s favorite
crossword game, with all of your friends that have an
Android device.
Note:
The first time you use Words Free, you will need to
download the updated application from Play Store.
When the Play Store page displays, tap
Update
or
Install
then follow the on-screen instructions. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 176.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
Words Free
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Tap
Login with Facebook
or
Login with Email Address
.
4. Enter your email address and tap
Connect!
.
5. Enter a preferred Username and tap
OK
.
6. Tap to create a new game and follow the on-
screen instructions.
YouTube
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide
variety of user-generated video content, including movie
Applications 183
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other
original videos.
Note:
YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional
data charges.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
YouTube
.
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,
scroll down to browse through the main page
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional
options.
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or
tap the title link.
4. If you prefer high quality video, as the video starts to
play, tap
HQ
.
5. Tap to go to your camcorder so you can take your
own videos. For more information, refer to “Using the
Camcorder” on page 89.
Note:
It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access
additional options, access the page via the Web browser
and tap
Sign in
at the top right corner, enter your
YouTube or Google username and password, and tap
Sign in
.
YP
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your
search in real-time.
Note:
The first time you use YP, you will need to download the
updated application from Play Store. When the Play
Store page displays, tap
Update
or
Install
then follow the
on-screen instructions. For more information, refer to
“Play Store” on page 176.
1. From the Home screen, tap ➔
YP
.
184
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 13.
3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap
Accept
to continue.
4. Read the introduction information and tap
Continue
.
5. Your location is found using GPS. Tap
OK
to allow YP to
use your current location.
6. Tap the
Find a business nearby!
field.
7. Enter information in the
What:
and
Near:
fields and tap
Search
.
8. Results will be displayed.
9. Tap to see the locations marked with pins on the
map.
10. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it
outwards to zoom in.
11. Tap a pin to read information about the location.
12. Tap
to display additional options.
Health and Safety Information 185
Section 11: Health and Safety Information
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”
are used in this section to refer to your phone.
Read this
information before using your mobile device
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
includes the following information:
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
researchers have reported biological changes associated
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of
electromagnetic energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the
genetic material.
186
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic
radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
between RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
that have shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
has supported additional research to address gaps in
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions
being drawn from this data. Additional information about
Interphone can be found at
http://com.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA
continues to monitor developments in this field.
Health and Safety Information 187
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the
COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/
index.html
.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
from communication technologies including cell phones and
brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-
center study involving 14 European and non-European
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
Program of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/
.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry
to take a number of steps, including the following:
•
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
•
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to
the user; and
•
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
188
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure
that safety standards continue to adequately protect the
public.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
your head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
and various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-
clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head
from RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory
attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these
products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike “hands-
free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere with
Health and Safety Information 189
proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to
boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF
absorption.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
apply to children and teenagers as well.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
the head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
•
FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
•
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
•
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
•
World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
•
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
•
Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
•
US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
190
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE).
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by
scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
energy.
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in
units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless
phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per
kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of
safety to give additional protection to the public and to
account for any variations in measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum value. This is
because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power
levels so as to use only the power required to reach the
network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base
station antenna, the lower the power output.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for
each model phone are performed in positions and locations
(e.g. at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the
FCC.
For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and
meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an
accessory that contains no metal and that positions the
mobile device a minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
Health and Safety Information 191
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
FCC RF exposure guidelines.
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this
mobile phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in
compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The
maximum SAR values for this model phone as reported in the
FCC equipment authorization grant are:
WCDMA/GSM/EDGE
The highest reported SAR values are:
•
Head: 0.36 W/kg
•
Body-worn accessory: 0.78 W/kg
•
Product Specific Use: 0.90 W/kg
WLAN
The highest reported SAR values are:
•
Head: 0.19 W/kg
•
Body-worn accessory: 0.12 W/kg
•
Product Specific Use: 0.11 W/kg
SAR information on this and other model phones can be
viewed online at
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea
. To find information
that pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the
phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere
on the case of the phone.
Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack
to find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a
particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it
should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a
particular phone. Additional product specific SAR information
can also be obtained at
www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar
.
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
FCC Part 15 Information to User:
Caution - Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.
192
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
operation of his or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
primary responsibility.
Do not engage in any activity while
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
impaired
. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand
and address distractions.
Health and Safety Information 193
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use
may be permitted in certain areas.
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
•
Use a hands-free device;
•
Secure your phone within easy reach;
•
Place calls when you are not moving;
•
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
•
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
•
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
•
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
an automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
games while operating a vehicle.
For more information
, go to
http://www.ctia.org
.
Battery Use and Safety
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage
. Most battery issues arise from improper
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the
continued use of damaged batteries.
194
•
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise
attempt to change the form of your battery
. Do not put a high
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
•
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear
to be working properly.
•
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source
. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in
high temperatures.
•
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire
. The phone
or the battery may explode when overheated.
•
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery
. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized
service center.
•
Avoid dropping the cell phone
. Dropping the phone or the
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
•
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way
.
•
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects
. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the
object causing the short-circuiting.
Important!
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
recharge your battery only with Samsung-
approved chargers which are specifically designed
for your phone.
Health and Safety Information 195
Warning! Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger
may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other
hazard
. Samsung's warranty does not cover damage
to the phone caused by non-Samsung-approved
batteries and/or chargers.
•
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers
.
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier-
recommended products and accessories. If unsure about whether
a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact the
manufacturer of the battery or charger.
•
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious
hazard
.
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung
mobile device by working with respected take-back
companies in every state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations
may be found at:
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted
at these locations for no fee.
196
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional
information regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm
or at
http://www.call2recycle.org/
.
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung
customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to
http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=STA
_recyle_your_phone_page
and follow the instructions to print
out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile
device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for
recycling.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call (877) 278-0799.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile
devices and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help
us protect the environment - recycle!
Warning!
Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
Health and Safety Information 197
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
POWER OUTLET.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause
injury to you.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty”
on page 208.
GPS & AGPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance
of location-based technology on your mobile device.
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted
Global Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information
from the cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS
uses your wireless service provider's network and therefore
198
airtime, data charges, and/or additional charges may apply in
accordance with your service plan. Contact your wireless
service provider for details.
Your Location
Location-based information includes information that can be
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile
device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless
network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if
you use applications that require location-based information
(e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit location-
based information. The location-based information may be
shared with third-parties, including your wireless service
provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other third-
parties providing services.
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the
emergency responders your approximate location.
AGPS has limitations and
might not work in your area
.
Therefore:
•
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of
your ability; and
•
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency
responder instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and
do change over time. In some areas, complete information
may not be available. Therefore,
you should always visually
confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with
what you see before following them. All users should pay
attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other
factors that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey
posted road signs
.
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless
mobile device for essential communications (medical
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to
Health and Safety Information 199
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal
strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service
providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap . The dialer is
displayed.
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).
Emergency numbers vary by location.
4. Tap the key.
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you
may first need to deactivate those features before you can
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency
call, remember to give all the necessary information as
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do
so.
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits.
If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying
with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this
may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or
explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand.
Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to
the mobile device.
200
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth
slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper
operation.
Responsible Listening
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss
.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume
settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-
induced hearing loss. This includes the use of headphones
(including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other
wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been
associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
Health and Safety Information 201
You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
•
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
an audio source.
•
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
•
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
hearing.
•
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
•
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/default.aspx
202
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
discuss alternatives.
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the device.
National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication
Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W.
Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Health and Safety Information 203
Persons who have such devices:
•
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
•
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
•
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
•
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
•
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical
device, consult your health care provider.
For more information see:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-
faqs.html#
.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your
mobile device off in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to
observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel
depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants,
or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a
204
potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always,
clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical
transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the
air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or
metal powders, and any other area where you would
normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309
modified the exception of wireless mobile devices under the
Hearing Aid Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require
digital wireless mobile devices be compatible with hearing
aids.
The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to
telecommunications services for persons with hearing
disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used
near some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear
implants), users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the
amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or
a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to
evaluate it for your personal needs.
M-Ratings
: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4
is the better/higher of the two ratings.
T-Ratings
: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device
Health and Safety Information 205
is relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid
and wireless mobile device rating values are then added
together.
A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6 is considered for best use.
If a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two
values equal M5. This is synonymous for T ratings. This
should provide the hearing aid user with “normal usage”
while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless
mobile device.
“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality
that is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is
intended to be synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is
intended to be synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T
marks are recommended by the Alliance for
Telecommunications Industries Solutions (ATIS). The U and
UT marks are referenced in Section 20.19 of the FCC Rules.
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
HAC/Wi-Fi for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with
hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of
this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your
hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any
interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the
manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid
compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange
policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.
M3 + M2 = 5 T3 + T2 = 5
206
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your
mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
expressly approved in this document could void your
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the
mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it
is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid
dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
•
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to
the device.
•
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in
your vehicle are securely mounted.
•
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
•
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its
parts, or accessories.
Health and Safety Information 207
•
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could
result.
•
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
•
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or
both.
208
Section 12: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for the
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the
Product. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or
damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use,
abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid,
moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual
physical, electrical or electromechanical stress;
(b) scratches, dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by
SAMSUNG; (c) defects or damage resulting from excessive
force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch
screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i)
defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception or
transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
Phone 1 Year
Batteries 1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year
Warranty Information 209
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for
which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new
Product. Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will
be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other
repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period
equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on
the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is
longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
and the seller’s name and address. To obtain assistance on
where to deliver the Product, please call SAMSUNG Customer
Care at 1-888-987-4357. If SAMSUNG determines that any
Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, you must
pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or
return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED
210
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE
OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF USE, TIME,
DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR
SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES
ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT.
SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS,
OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-
PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE
PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not
Warranty Information 211
be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any
other person’s or entity’s Product or claim, and specifically,
without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any
circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The
arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator,
whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief
allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be
conducted according to the American Arbitration Association
(AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer
disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the
Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas,
without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall
govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or
performance.
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI
212
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Warranty.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center
for details.
Important!
Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in
order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
Warranty Information 213
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All
rights reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval.
Specifications and availability subject to change without
notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for
Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. for software owned by Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated companies and its third
party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA,
which includes computer software and may include
associated media, printed materials, “online” or electronic
documentation (“Software”). BY CLICKING THE “I ACCEPT”
BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE “I
ACCEPT”, AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS
OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE
“DECLINE” BUTTON, AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine-
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
214
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation),
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and
its affiliates may collect and use technical information
gathered as part of the product support services related to
the Software provided to you, if any, related to the Software.
Samsung may use this information solely to improve its
products or to provide customized services or technologies to
you and will not disclose this information in a form that
personally identifies you.
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that
Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after
the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless
we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use
Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed
for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the
upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the
Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the
Warranty Information 215
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all
copies, full or partial, of the Software.
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. SAMSUNG makes no representations
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since SAMSUNG
has no control over such applications, Purchaser
acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible
for the availability of such applications and is not responsible
or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or
other materials on or available from such applications.
Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of
third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole risk and that
the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance,
accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to Purchaser to
take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to
Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,
sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the
third-party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees
that SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or
indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to
caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any
such third-party content, products, or services available on
or through any such application. Purchaser acknowledges
and agrees that your use of any third-party application is
governed by such third-party application provider’s Terms of
Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such
agreement and that any information or personal data you
provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-
party application provider, will be subject to such third-party
application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy exists.
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES
OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party
Applications. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR
RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR
OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD-
PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR
216
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION
AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR
ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER
PURCHASER’S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD-
PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE
ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT,
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT
AGAINST INTERFERENE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE
THRID-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS
CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET
PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF
THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED
OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR,
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR
INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY
PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY.
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD-
PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR
RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION,
COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT, NETWORK
Warranty Information 217
CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR
EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO
PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF
PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS
MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA,
SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF
ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
12. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products
provided to the United States Government pursuant to
solicitations issued on or after December 1, 1995 is provided
with the commercial rights and restrictions described
elsewhere herein. All Software and Products provided to the
United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued
prior to December 1, 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED
RIGHTS as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14 (JUNE
1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), as
applicable.
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application
of which is expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the
parties.
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral
218
or written communications, proposals and representations
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions
shall continue in full force and effect.
Social Hub
Legal Terms and Privacy
Samsung's Social Hub and (if applicable) the website where
you accessed this Disclaimer (collectively, the "Service"), is
being made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co.,
Ltd., and its affiliates and suppliers (collectively "Samsung")
subject to the following enclosed documents:
•
Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the
Service generally;
•
Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically
governs your use of the software which forms part of, or enables
you to access, the Service; and
•
Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of
personal information in connection with your access to and use of
the Service.
By using the Service, you agree to be bound by the above
documents. Please read through those documents to make
sure you understand the basis on which Samsung is
providing the Service to you.
You will be able to access additional features available at
socialhub.samsungmobile.com.
Social Hub Terms and Conditions
Acceptance of the Terms
These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the
Social Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence
Agreement (collectively "Terms") govern your use of Social
Hub, which comprises all content and services accessible
through Social Hub (including third party content and
services), and (if applicable) the website where you
accessed these Terms (collectively the "Service"). The Terms
constitute an agreement between you and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd., and its affiliates (collectively
"Samsung") with respect to the Service. By using the
Service, you agree to be legally bound to the Terms.
You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to
the Terms. To the extent permitted by applicable law,
Samsung reserves the right to modify, update, supplement,
revise or otherwise change the Terms, and to impose new or
Warranty Information 219
additional rules, policies, terms or conditions in relation to
the Service, from time to time with or without notice to you
("Amendments").
Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by
sending an email message to the email address listed in your
account information (if any), or by posting the notice on the
Social Hub website.
Such Amendments will be effective immediately and
incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such
notice. You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms.
Your continued use of the Service will be deemed to
constitute your acceptance of any and all such Amendments.
Eligibility
To use the Service, you must be at least sixteen (16) years of
age. If you are at least sixteen (16 ) years of age but are a
minor for legal purposes where you live, you must review the
Terms and have your parent or legal guardian accept the
Terms on your behalf in order for you to use the Service. The
person accepting the Terms on your behalf must be legally
competent.
Your Information
When required to provide information in connection with your
use of the Service, you agree to provide truthful and
complete information. Providing misleading information
about your identity is forbidden. When you first use the
Service, you may be required to create a username and a
password.
You (and your parent or legal guardian, if you are a minor) are
personally responsible for any use of the Service with your
username and password.
You agree to take due care in protecting your username and
password against misuse by others and promptly notify
Samsung about any misuse.
Termination of Service
Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain
parts of the Service if there is an indication that you have
breached the Terms or at any time in its sole discretion.
Your Material
Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy, Samsung
shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or
content you have submitted in the course of using the
Service ("Material") when your access to the Service is
220
terminated. Your submission of Material in the course of
using the Service does not transfer ownership rights in the
Material to Samsung. After the Material is removed from the
Service by either you or Samsung, some traces of the
Material may remain and copies of the Material may still
reside within the servers used in providing the Service.
However, Samsung does not claim ownership in your
Material.
You represent and warrant that you have obtained any
consents, permission or licenses that may be required for
you to have the legal right to submit any Material. Samsung
reserves the right to terminate your access to the Service if
Samsung determines, at its sole discretion, that you have
repeatedly submitted infringing Materials to the Service.
Using the Service
You agree to:
•
Use the Service only for your private, non-commercial purposes;
•
Comply with applicable laws, the Terms and good manners;
•
Not submit unlawful, offensive, abusive, pornographic, harassing,
libelous or other inappropriate Material;
•
Respect the privacy of others;
•
Obtain any consents, permission or licenses that may be required
for you to have the legal right to submit any Material; and
•
Not distribute or post spam, unreasonably large files, chain
letters, pyramid schemes, viruses or any other technologies that
may harm the Service, or the interest or property of the Service
users.
Unauthorized use of the Service (including any use in
contravention of the Terms) is prohibited and may result in
criminal prosecution and/or civil liability.
Restrictions
You and any third party directed by You must not display,
copy, store, modify, sell, publish or redistribute the Service
(whether all or any portion of it), and such displaying,
copying, storing, modification, sale, publishing and
redistribution shall be prohibited unless you have obtained all
necessary rights and permissions from Samsung and the
owners and right holders of such the Service or relevant part.
You must not use the Service for any purposes other than
those permitted under the Terms. Without limiting this
restriction, you must not use the service for any illegal
purposes, to make unsolicited offers or advertisements, to
impersonate or falsely claim affiliation with any person or
Warranty Information 221
entity, to misrepresent, harass, defraud or defame others, to
post obscene or unreasonably offensive material, to
negatively present the Service, nor for any commercial
purposes.
Except as expressly permitted by the Terms, and except to
the extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from
restraining you from doing so, you are not allowed to
disassemble, reverse engineer, tamper with the Service,
transmit malicious code or collect information of other users
through the Service.
You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of
or tamper with the Service or any content or service
contained in or provided through the Service, or any servers
used in providing the Service, or to unreasonably affect
others' enjoyment of the Service in any way.
Actions Required by Law
Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and/or
data retention requirements imposed by your country of
residence or any other country in which you use the Service.
Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or
terminate your access to the Service, at any time in its sole
discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or
regulatory agencies to do so.
Third Party Sites and Content
The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that
are owned or operated by third parties. Access to such sites
does not imply that Samsung endorses the site or the
conduct, products or services on the site. Upon accessing
any such site, you must review and agree to the rules of use
of the relevant site before using the site.
You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control
over the content, products or services of third-party sites and
does not assume any responsibility for or in respect of such
content, products or services. Third party content and
services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and
Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any
content or service will remain available for any period of
time. Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or
liability for any interruption or suspension of any third party
content or service.
In addition, Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for
customer service related to third party sites. Any question or
request for service relating to third party sites should be
made directly to the relevant site operator.
222
Subscription Information
Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through
your service provider's network. Your network service
provider may charge you for such data transmission.
Samsung assumes no responsibility for the payment of any
such charges.
Availability
The Service may be network dependent - contact your
network service provider for more information. Samsung
reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to change, improve
and correct the Service. The Service may not be available
during maintenance breaks and other times. Samsung may
also decide to discontinue the Service or any part thereof in
its sole discretion. In such case you will be provided with
prior notification.
Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service, or
any part thereof, is appropriate or available for use in any
particular jurisdiction. If you choose to access the Service,
you do so on you own initiative and at you own risk, and you
are responsible for complying with all US federal, state and
local laws, rules and regulations.
Dealings with Others
You may interact with other users on or through the Service.
You agree that any such interactions do not involve Samsung
and are solely between you and the other user(s).
Intellectual Property
The Service and related software are protected under
international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that
copyrights are claimed by Samsung.
Subject to the Terms, Samsung retains all right, title and
interest in the Service and in all Samsung's products,
software and other properties provided to you or used by you
through the Service.
Personal Data
The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional
provisions govern the use of your personal information. When
you access the Service, Samsung may ask for or otherwise
collect certain personal information such as your email
address along with your user name and password and, in
certain cases, your mobile phone number so that we can
communicate with you, for example to send notifications of
incoming messages. When you use the Service, certain
technical information such as the type and serial number of
your mobile device, Internet protocol address, your mobile
Warranty Information 223
network and country codes, timezone, technical details of
your client as well as your transactions with Samsung, for
example your acceptance of the Terms, will be automatically
collected by Samsung.
The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are
explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy. Samsung may also
participate with your selected service providers in
maintaining your contact lists.
The third party services and content you access through the
Service and the telecommunications carriers and the
network through which you access the Service are provided
and hosted by your selected third party content and service
providers who typically has a privacy policy of its own. We
recommend you familiarize yourself with your service
provider's privacy policy. Samsung is not responsible for the
privacy or any other practices of such service providers.
Although your messages will be transmitted through
Samsung's servers, Samsung will not process the content or
headers of your messages for any purpose other than as
necessary to deliver and manage your messages, unless
otherwise required by law.
In connection with certain services accessible via the
Service, Samsung may cooperate with your operator and
other third parties. Samsung may receive from such third
parties certain device specific non-personal information,
such as device serial number of the devices sold by the
operator with preinstalled software for the Service. Such
information may be used for aanalyzing the activation of the
Service.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE"
BASIS. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW
AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, SAMSUNG DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR OR VIRUS-FREE. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, NO
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE AVAILABILITY,
ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OF THE SERVICE, INCLUDING ANY
INFORMATION OR CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE
SERVICE. YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND ACKNOWLEDGE THAT
224
THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT
YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT FROM VARIOUS
SOURCES.
SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY
THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE
ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICE, NOR SHALL SAMSUNG
BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED
ON OR DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES.
YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES,
LOSSES, COSTS, OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL
INJURY CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL
MISCONDUCT, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH
RESPECT TO YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE (INCLUDING DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES).
IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE
PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS, THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR
INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS.
CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
MAY IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE
OBLIGATIONS UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE
EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE
EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A
LIMITED EXTENT. THE TERMS MUST BE READ SUBJECT TO
THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS. IF THESE STATUTORY
PROVISIONS APPLY, TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH SAMSUNG IS
ABLE TO DO SO, SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY UNDER
THOSE PROVISIONS TO, AT ITS OPTION, IN THE CASE OF
SERVICES (A) THE SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN;
OR (B) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE
SERVICES SUPPLIED AGAIN AND, IN THE CASE OF GOODS, (A)
THE REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF
EQUIVALENT GOODS; (B) THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS; (C) THE
PAYMENT OF THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF
ACQUIRING EQUIVALENT GOODS; OR (D) THE PAYMENT OF
THE COST OF HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED.
Indemnification
You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Samsung
from and against any and all third party claims and all
liabilities, assessments, losses, costs or damages resulting
from or arising out of i) your breach of the Terms, ii) your
infringement or violation of any intellectual property, other
rights or privacy of a third party, iii) misuse of the Service by
Warranty Information 225
a third party where such misuse was made possible due to
your failure to take reasonable measures to protect your
username and password against misuse.
Choice of Law
Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided
otherwise herein, the Terms shall be governed by the laws of
the State of New York without regard to its conflict of law
provisions.
You and Samsung agree to submit to the non-exclusive
jurisdiction of the competent courts in the State of New York
to resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms.
Notwithstanding this, you agree that Samsung shall still be
allowed to apply for injunctive remedies (or equivalent type
of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
Miscellaneous
The Terms (including all documents comprising the Terms)
constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung,
and supersedes any prior agreement between you and
Samsung, with respect to your use of the Service. Your use of
any third-party content or service accessed via the Service
will be governed by the terms and conditions furnished with,
and applicable to that content or service. If any provision of
the Terms is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that
portion of the Terms shall be construed in a manner
consistent with applicable law to reflect, as nearly as
possible, the original intentions of the parties, and the
remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in full force and
effect. Samsung's failure to enforce any right or provision of
the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such provision, or
any other provision of the Terms.
Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to
fulfill any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is
due to any cause or condition beyond the reasonable control
of Samsung. If there is any conflict between these Social Hub
Terms and Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy, the
provisions of these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall
prevail. The provisions of the Terms that are intended to or
by their nature should survive termination of your use of the
Service shall remain valid after any such termination.
Social Hub Privacy Policy
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") is committed to
protecting the online privacy of visitors, users and customers
to our Social Hub service. This privacy policy ( "Privacy
Policy") forms part of the Terms which govern your use of
Social Hub(excluding any third party content and services),
and (if applicable) the website where you accessed this
226
Privacy Policy, (collectively, the "Service"). The purpose of
the Privacy Policy is to inform you about the types of
information we gather about you when you access or use the
Service, how we may use that information, and if and how
we disclose it to third parties.
All users of the Service are required to provide true, current,
complete and accurate personal information when prompted
and we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in
good faith to be incorrect, false, falsified, or fraudulent, or
inconsistent with or in violation of the Privacy Policy.
We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent
in relation to your use of the Service. Separate from such
consent, your access or use of the Service will be construed
as your acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our
collection, use, disclosure, management and storage of your
personal information as described below. We may, from time
to time, transfer or merge any personal information collected
off-line to our online databases or store off-line information
in an electronic format. We may also combine personal
information we collect online with information available from
other sources, including information received from our
affiliates, marketing companies, or advertisers. This Privacy
Policy covers all such personal information and will remain in
full force and effect as long as you are a user of the Service,
even if your use of or participation in any particular service,
feature, function or promotional activity terminates, expires,
ceases, is suspended or deactivated for any reason.
INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT
Personal Information
We may request that you supply us with "personal"
information, such as your name, e-mail address, mailing
address, home or work telephone number in the course of
you accessing or using the Service, such as via registration
forms, surveys, and polls. In each such case, you will know
what categories of information we collect because you will
actively provide the information to us. You may not be able to
fully utilize all of the features or components of the Service if
you choose not to provide certain information. If you do
choose to give us personal information through the Service,
we will collect and retain that information.
Non-Personal Information
When you use the Service, we may also collect "non-
personal" information. We consider "non-personal
information" to be information that, by itself, cannot be used
to identify or contact you personally, such as demographic
information (your age, gender, income, education,
Warranty Information 227
profession, zip code, etc.). Non-personal information may
also include technical information, such as your IP address
and other anonymous data involving your use of the Service.
Non-personal information may also include information that
you provide us through your use of the Service, such as the
terms you enter into the search functions of Social Hub, mail
inbox and instant messenger. We reserve the right to use or
disclose non-personal information in any way we see fit.
USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT
Our Services
We use your personal information to provide you with any
services that you may request or require, to communicate
with you and to allow you to participate in online surveys. We
use aggregated non-personal information about our users to
understand the demographics of users of the Service, such
as the percentage of male and female users, the geographic
distribution of our users, the age ranges of our users, a
combination of these and/or other demographics. We may
also use the personal or non-personal information we collect
to analyze how Service is being used, and to improve the
content of the Service, and for marketing and promotional
efforts.
E-mail Communications
If you send us an e-mail with questions or comments, we
may use your personal information to respond to your
questions or comments, and we may save your questions or
comments for future reference. Aside from our reply to such
an e-mail, it is not our standard practice to send you e-mail
unless you request a particular service that involves e-mail
communications. However, you consent to us contacting you
by e-mail, and sending you information about products and
services which we believe may be of interest to you. You may
have the opportunity to subscribe to an electronic newsletter
in which case information about the Service or our
advertisers will be sent to your e-mail address. We will
provide you with the option to change your preferences and
opt-out of receiving those communications. You may request
at any time that we not e-mail you in future by clicking the
"unsubscribe" link which is included at the bottom of any e-
mail that you receive from us. If you unsubscribe, we will
make reasonable efforts to discontinue e-mail
communications to you as soon as practicable.
228
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO
THIRD PARTIES
Aggregate Information
Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy, we do
not share your personal information with any third party
without your permission. We may disclose aggregate
information, such as demographic information, and our
statistical analyses to third parties, including advertisers or
other business partners. This aggregate information does not
include your personal information.
Service Providers
We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in
providing you certain services. For example, we may use
third parties to provide advertising, marketing and
promotional assistance, provide e-mail services, or facilitate
our online services. In those instances, we may need to
share your personal information with them. We require these
companies to use your personal information only to provide
the particular product or service and do not authorize them to
use your personal information for any other reason.
We sometimes offer promotions in conjunction with a third
party sponsor.
If you choose to participate in those promotions, we may
share your information with the sponsor if they need it to
send you a product or other special promotion they offer.
Third Party Advertisers
We may use third-party advertising companies to deliver
specific advertisements to you. These companies may collect
non-personal information about your visits to Social Hub in
order to provide advertisements about products and services
that may be of interest to you. These companies may also
aggregate your non-personal information for use in targeted
advertising, marketing research, and other similar purposes.
These companies may place their own cookies on your
computer. If you want to prevent a third-party advertiser from
collecting and using this information, you may visit each third
party advertiser's website directly and opt-out.
Other Disclosures
We may disclose personal information when we are required
or requested to do so by law, court order or other
government or law enforcement authority or regulatory
agency; to enforce or apply our rights and agreements; or
when we believe in good faith that disclosing this information
Warranty Information 229
is necessary or advisable, including, for example, to protect
the rights, property, or safety of the Service and Samsung,
our users, or others.
CHILDREN
The Service is not designed for use by children without their
parent's supervision. We ask that anyone under the age of
sixteen (16) not submit any personal information through the
Service. We do not knowingly collect any personal
information from children under the age of eighteen, and
therefore we do not knowingly distribute such information to
third parties.
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE
COLLECT
The security of your personal information is important to us.
We maintain physical, electronic, and procedural safeguards
to secure your personal information. However, there is
always some risk in transmitting information electronically.
The personal information we collect is stored within
databases that we control.
As we deem appropriate, we use security measures
consistent with industry standards, such as firewalls and
encryption technology, to protect your information. However,
we cannot guarantee the security of our databases, nor can
we guarantee that information you supply won't be
intercepted while being transmitted to us over the Internet.
CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC
AREAS
Our third party service and content providers may offer chat,
user reviews, bulletin boards, or other public functions and
any posting by you is considered public information available
to other users. Any posting is governed in accordance with
the third party service and content providers' terms and
conditions. You should take care not to use personal
information in your screen name or other information that
might be publicly available to other users.
Archived Information
We maintain archives of web logs, database, and other
systems and information in relation to the Service. Please
note that it is possible some of this information may remain
archived after we delete the information from its active
database. We maintain archives for disaster recovery, legal
and other non-marketing purposes.
230
How can I update my profile?
You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by
notifying us when you change zip/postal code, country of
residence, age range, or e-mail address. If at any time you
wish to update your information or stop receiving
communication from us, sign in to the Service and then
select 'update your profile' to change your preferences.
CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES
Registration may be required to enter promotions such as
contests and sweepstakes on Social Hub. These registration
or entry processes may require your submission of personal
information such as your first and last name, street address,
city, state and zip code, e-mail address, telephone number
and date of birth. The entry page and/or rules for the
promotion will provide the specific requirements for the
promotion. You may also have the opportunity to opt-in to
special offers from our advertisers in connection with these
promotions.
ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE
COLLECT
Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy,
the accuracy of your personal information or the use of your
personal information, or any requests that we correct,
update, or remove your information in our databases, should
be directed via e-mail to s.dufresne@Samsung.com, or via
regular mail to:
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive, Richardson, TX 75082
Attn: Customer Support Department
After receiving a request to change your information, we will
make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal
information stored in databases we actively use to operate
the Service will be updated, corrected, changed or deleted,
as appropriate, as soon as reasonably practicable. However,
we reserve the right to retain in our archival files any
information we remove from or change in our active
databases. We may retain such information to resolve
disputes, troubleshoot problems and enforce our Terms.
In addition, it is not technologically possible to remove each
and every record of the information you have provided to us.
A copy of your personal information may exist in a non-
erasable form that will be difficult or impossible for us to
locate.
Warranty Information 231
CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY
This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29, 2010 and
complies with Samsung's Corporate Privacy Policy. We
reserve the right to change this Privacy Policy at any time,
and will post any such changes to this Privacy Policy on the
Social Hub website. Please refer back to the Social Hub
website on a regular basis to obtain the most up to date
Privacy Policy.
Social Hub End User License
Agreement
1. SOCIAL HUB
This end user license ("License") allows you to use Social
Hub ("Software") made available on your mobile device. This
License is a legally binding agreement between you and
Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. the ("Licensor").
2. LICENSE
2.1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a
limited, personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to
use the Software in object code executable only form on a
single device for non-commercial uses.
2.2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License
are reserved to Licensor, and you agree not to take or permit
any action with respect to the Software that is not expressly
authorised under this License. For the avoidance of doubt,
you have no right to use, incorporate into other products,
copy, modify, translate or transfer to any third party the
Software or any modification, adaptation or copy of the
Software or any part thereof, nor to decompile, reverse
engineer, or disassemble the binary code of the Software,
either in whole or in part, except as expressly provided in this
License.
2.3 The Software is licensed to you only. You may not rent,
lease, sub-license, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise
dispose of the Software, on a temporary or permanent basis
without the prior written consent of Licensor.
3. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
RIGHTS
3.1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this
License and you acknowledge that all intellectual property
rights in or relating to the Software and all parts of the
Software are and shall remain the exclusive property of
Licensor or its licensors.
232
3.2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright
notices or similar proprietary devices, including without
limitation any electronic watermarks or other identifiers, that
may be incorporated in the Software or any copy of the
Software.
4. CONFIDENTIALITY
4.1 The structure, organisation and source code of the
Software are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary
confidential information of Licensor and its licensors. You
agree not to provide or disclose any such confidential
information in the Software or derived from it to any third
party.
4.2 The provisions of clause 4.1 will not apply to any
information which is:
4.2.1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality
(otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor); or
4.2.2 already in your possession, provided that Licensee can
show such possession from written records (other than as a
result of a breach of this clause 4); or
4.2.3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain
(other than as a result of a breach of this
clause 4).
4.3 To the extent that any information is necessarily
disclosed pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or
court order, such disclosure shall not be a breach of this
clause 4 provided you do what you can to prevent any such
disclosure.
5. WARRANTY AND SUPPORT
The Software is provided "as is" with no representation,
guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or
that it does not and will not infringe any third party rights
(including intellectual property rights). Licensor has no
obligation under this License to provide technical or other
support to you.
6. LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
6.1 Licensor does not exclude its liability (if any) to you:
6.1.1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor's
negligence;
6.1.2 for fraud; or
6.1.3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor
to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability.
6.2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY
EXCLUDES (TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW),
Warranty Information 233
ALL CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES (INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL
MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE) AND STIPULATIONS,
EXPRESS (OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE)
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY, CUSTOMARY OR OTHERWISE
WHICH, BUT FOR SUCH EXCLUSION, WOULD OR MIGHT
SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF YOU. EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS
LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE.
6.3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6.1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO
LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER (WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF STATUTORY
DUTY, RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY INJURY,
DEATH, DAMAGE OR DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
LOSS (ALL THREE OF WHICH TERMS INCLUDE, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, PURE ECONOMIC LOSS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS) HOWSOEVER
CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH:
6.3.1 THE SOFTWARE, OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR
SUPPLY, OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY, OF THE
SOFTWARE BY LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR'S
EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUB-CONTRACTORS;
6.3.2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE;
6.3.3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE; OR
6.3.4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE, OR ADVICE
GIVEN OR NOT GIVEN, BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR.
6.4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO
YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST
PROFITS, EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION WILL
APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
FRAUD, MISREPRESENTATION, BREACH OF CONTRACT,
NEGILIGENCE, PERSONAL INJURY, PRODUCTS LIABILITY,
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT, OR ANY OTHER
THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SAMSUNG HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK, AND HEREBY
WAIVE, ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, TREBLE,
OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG. THIS LIMITATION
AND WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING
234
AGAINST ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG
WOULD BE REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH
CLAIM.
6.5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause
6 are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such
risk and/or insure accordingly.
6.6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected
by this clause 6.
7. TERM AND TERMINATION
7.1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your
acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software
and shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause
7.2 or otherwise in accordance with this License.
7.2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to
comply with any term or condition of this License or if you
cease to use the Software for any reason.
7.3 Upon termination of this License for any reason
whatsoever Licensor retains the right to permanently disable
your access to the Software.
7.4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is
without prejudice to the rights, duties and liabilities of either
party accrued prior to termination. Clauses 2.2, 2.3, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7.3, 8, 9 and 10 of this License will continue to be
enforceable notwithstanding termination.
8. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
8.1 The formation, existence, construction, performance,
validity and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any
term of this License will be governed by the laws of the State
of New York.
8.2 The courts in New York City will have non-exclusive
jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in
connection with this License. The parties irrevocably agree
to submit to that jurisdiction.
9. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW
You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact
that this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of
Korea, you may be subject to additional laws in other
jurisdictions with respect to your use of the Software. You
will comply with the laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the
Software, including without limitation any applicable export
laws or regulations.
Warranty Information 235
10.GENERAL
10.1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any
court, tribunal, administrative body or authority of competent
jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable then that
provision will, to the extent required, be severed from this
License and will be ineffective without, as far as is possible,
modifying any other clause or part of this License and this
will not affect any other provisions of this License which will
remain in full force and effect.
10.2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right,
power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any
partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same, or
of some other right, power or remedy.
10.3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its
terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it.
10.4 This License contains all the terms which the parties
have agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License
and supersedes any prior written or oral agreements,
representations or understandings between the parties in
relation to such subject matter.
10.5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this
License by updating the License on its web site, or by
notifying you by post or by e-mail. You are advised to check
the Licensor's website periodically for notices concerning
revisions. Your continued use of the Software shall be
deemed to constitute acceptance of any revised terms.
10.6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this
License by using the Software on any device.
236
Section 13: Samsung Product Registration
Register now at
www.samsung.com/register
Get More
• Latest info on promotions, events and special oers on related products
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion
• Great deals on downloads
Sign Up Now
Customize your Samsung device experience
• Activate product warranty
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account
• No monthly fees
Scan this code to go
directly to the registration page.
237
Index
A
Abc mode 56
About Phone 138
Accounts and Synchronization set-
tings 122
Adding a New Contact
Idle Screen 61
Address Book 61
Adding a New Contact 61
Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers 63
Copying an entry to the Phone 71
Copying Entry to Phone 71
Copying Entry to SIM Card 71
Deleting Address Book Entries 72
Dialing a Number 64
Favorites 70
Finding an Address Book Entry 64
Group Settings 69
Managing Address Book Entries
70
Service Dialing Numbers 72
Using Contacts List 64
Address Book Options 67
Airplane mode 109, 113
Alarm 162
Amazon Kindle 157
Applications
Using the Camcorder 89
Using the Camera 83
World Clock 163
Applications settings
allow mock locations 137
managing 122
running services 122
stay awake 137
USB debugging 136
AT&T Code Scanner 157
AT&T Music
Playlists 77
AT&T Navigator 159
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 149
B
Back key 31
Battery
charging 10
Installing 9
Low Battery Indicator 11
Battery Use & Safety 193
Bluetooth
Sending contacts 153
Books
Play Books 176
C
Calculator 159
Calendar 160
Call Functions 44
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
52
Address Book 46
Adjusting the Call Volume 50
Answering a Call 46
Call Back Missed Call 48
Call Duration 50
Call Log 47
Call Waiting 54
238
Correcting the Number 45
Dialing a Recent Number 45
Ending a Call 45
International Call 44
Making a Call 44
Manual Pause Dialing 44
Options During a Call 50
Putting a Call on Hold 51
Saving the Missed Call Number to
Address Book 48
Searching for a Number in
Address Book 54
Using the Speakerphone 53
Viewing All Calls 47
Viewing Missed Calls 47
Camcorder 89
Accessing the Video Folder 91
Camcorder Options 90
Shooting Video 89
Camcorder Options
Camcorder Options after a Video is
Taken 91
Camera 82
Accessing the Pictures Folder 87
Camera Options 84, 90
Picture Folder 87
Taking Pictures 83
Care and Maintenance 199
Changing Your Settings 107
Charging battery 10
Children and Cell Phones 189
Clock 162
Code Scanner 157
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS) 101, 191
Contacts 61
Cookies
Emptying 143
Creating a Playlist 77
D
Developer Options 136
Diary 170
Display
icons 21
Display / Touch-Screen 197
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
185
Downloads 164
E
Email 102
Creating a Corporate Email
Account 102
Creating Additional Email
Accounts 103
Switching Between Email
Accounts 103
Emergency Alerts 101
Emergency Calls 198
Entering Text 55
Changing the Text Entry Mode 56
Using 123Sym Mode 57
Using Abc Mode 56
Using Android Keyboard 58
Using Swype 58
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 57
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals 185
F
Facebook 165
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 204
FCC Notice and Cautions 206
239
Featured Apps 165
G
Gallery 81
viewing pictures 81
viewing videos 82
Getting Started 6
Setting Up Your Phone 6
Voice mail 14
Gmail 103
Google Maps 167
Google Play Music 78
Google Search Bar 31
Google Voice Typing 59
Configuring 59
Using 59
GPS & AGPS 197
Group
Adding an Entry 69
Editing 70
Removing an Entry 69
Group Settings
Editing a Caller Group 70
H
Health and Safety Information 185
Home key 31
Hotspot Guru 150
Hotspots 150
I
Icons
Application 24
Indicator 21
Icons, description 21
In-Call Options 50
International Call 44
Internet 140
J
Joining Contacts 65
K
Keyboard Settings 128
Android keyboard 128
Samsung keypad 129
Swype 131
Keypad
Changing Text Input 56
Kindle 157
L
Landscape 55
Language and keyboard settings
select locale 128
Latitude 166
Legal Terms and Privacy 218
Live TV 78
Location services settings 123
M
Maps 167
Media Hub 27, 73
Memo 169
Memory Card 42
Memory Card Installation 7
Menu
key 31
Menu Navigation 31
Message Options 96
Message Search 99
Messaging
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 95
Deleting a message 99
Gmail 103
Options 96
Settings 100
240
Signing into Email 102
Signing into Gmail 103
Types of Messages 95
Messenger 106
microSD card 7, 42
Installing 8
Removing 8
microSDHC card 7, 42
Mini Diary 170
Mobile Web 140
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Browser 141
Navigating with the Mobile Web
140
Using Bookmarks 142
Motion 136
Movies 81
Multimedia 73
Music File Extensions
3GP 75
AAC 75
AAC+ 75
eAAC+ 75
M4A 75
MP3 75
MP4 75
WMA 75
Music Player 75
adding music 77
creating a playlist 77
removing music 77
Mute 51, 54
My Files 172
myAT&T 172
N
Navigation 173
command keys 31
context-sensitive menus 32
terms used 32
touch gestures 32
Navigation Options 173
Navigator 159
News 175
News & Weather 175
NFC 155
O
Operating Environment 202
Other Important Safety Information
206
P
PC Connections 153
Personal Localized Alerting Network
(PLAN) 101, 191
Phone
Front View 18
icons 21
Rear View 20
Side View 19
Switching On/Off 11
Pictures 81
Gallery 81
Places 175
Play Books 176
Play Movies 81
Play Music 78
Play Store 176
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot 111
Powering
Off 11
On 11
Predictive text 57
Privacy settings
241
factory data reset 134
Q
Qik Video Chat 79
Quickoffice 177
QWERTY keypad 55
R
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 188
Reject list 50
Reset
factory data 134
Responsible Listening 200
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 206
S
Safe Mode 15
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-
cling 195
SD Card 42
Search Bar 31
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE
COLLECT 229
Security settings
device administration 126
trusted credentials 126
Service Dialing Numbers 72
Settings 107
Shortcuts 21
SIM card
installation 7
Installing 6
Smart Practices While Driving 192
Smart Wi-Fi 149
Snooze 163
Social Hub 178, 218
INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT
226
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 223
USE OF INFORMATION WE
COLLECT 227
Social Hub Privacy Policy 225
Social Hub Terms and Conditions 218
Software Update 139
Speakerphone Key 53
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi-
fication Information 190
Stopwatch 163
Swap 52
Swype
entering text using 58
Preferences 59
Symbol/Numeric mode 57
Synchronization settings
auto-sync 123
System Recovery 14
T
Task 179
Task Manager 179
Tethering 111
Text Input
Abc mode 56
Methods 55
numeric mode 57
symbol mode 57
Timer 164
Touch Screen 12
Lock/Unlock 12
Travel Charger 10
Using 10
TTY Mode 115
242
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 196
Understanding Your Phone 17
Features of Your Phone 17
Front View 18
Rear View 20
Side Views 19
Unmute 51
USB connection modes 153
USB connections
as a mass storage device 154
USB settings
as a mass storage device 154
mass storage device 154
USB Tethering 111
USB utilities 109
Using Favorites
Adding Favorites 143
Deleting a Favorite 143
Editing Favorites 143
V
Video Chat 79
Video Player 80
Voice Mail
Accessing 14
From Another Phone 14
Setup 14
Voice Recorder 181
Voice talk 181
Voice Typing
Configuring 59
Using 59
Volume 117
W
Warranty Information 208
Weather 175
Web 140
Widgets
Calculator 25
Calendar 25
Camera 25
Email 26
Gmail 26, 165
Memo 27
Settings 29, 178
Video Player 30
Voice Recorder 30, 181
YouTube 30
Wi-Fi 146
Wi-Fi Direct 112, 148
Words Free 182
World Clock
Deleting an Entry 163
World clock 163
Y
YouTube 182
YP (Yellowpages mobile) 183

Navigation menu